ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Agenda_Intro1.pdf

Intro1_M00_toc.pdf

Intro1_M01_intro.pdf

Intro1_M02_fea.pdf

Intro1_M03_getting_started.pdf

Intro1_M04_basics.pdf

Intro1_M05_gen_procedure.pdf

Intro1_M06_create_solid_model.pdf

Intro1_M07_create_FEA_model.pdf

Intro1_M08_define_material.pdf

Intro1_M09_loading.pdf

Intro1_M10_solution.pdf

Intro1_M11_structural.pdf

Intro1_M12_thermal.pdf

Intro1_M13_postprocessing.pdf

Intro1_M14_short-topics.pdf

Intro1_MAPP_Appendix.pdf

I d i ANSYS

Training Manual

Introduction to ANSYS Part 1Part 1

Training ManualIntroduction to ANSYS - Part 1

Inventory Number: 002268First Edition

ANSYS Release: 10.0Published Date: February 7, 2006

Registered Trademarks:ANSYS® is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveAll other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Disclaimer Notice:This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc. Documentation Review and Approval Procedures. “This ANSYS Inc. software product (the Program) and program documentation (Documentation) are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that License Agreement.”

Copyright © 2006 SAS IP IncCopyright © 2006 SAS IP, Inc.

Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.

All Rights Reserved.

Training Manual

Introduction to ANSYS - Part 1

Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

1. Introduction (8:00am – 8:15am) 1-1

2. FEA and ANSYS (8:15am – 9:00am) 2-1A. About the Company 2-2B About ANSYS 2-4

5. General Analysis Procedure (1:00 – 1:30pm) 5-1A. Preliminary Decisions 5-5B. Preprocessing 5-8

• Create Solid Model 5-8 OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

B. About ANSYS 2-4C. What is FEA? 2-10D. Instructor Example 2-13E. Workshop (15 min.)

2-14

3. Getting Started (9:00am – 11:00am) 3-1

• Create FEA Model 5-10• Define Material 5-12

C. Solution 5-13• Define Loads 5-13

D. Postprocessing 5-15• Review Results 5-15

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g ( )A. Interactive vs Batch Mode 3-2B. Starting ANSYS 3-3C. Product Launcher 3-4D. ANSYS Workbench 3-9E. Memory 3-12F. GUI 3-15G The Database and Files 3 37

• Verification 5-18

6. Creating the Solid Model (1:30pm – 2:45pm) 6-1A. What to Model? 6-3B. Importing Geometry 6-14

• IGES Imports 6-14 NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

G. The Database and Files 3-37H. Exiting ANSYS 3-46I. On-Line Help 3-47J. Workshop (30 min.) 3-53

4. ANSYS Basics (11:00am – 12:00pm) 4-1A. Overview 4-2

IGES Imports 6 14• Connection Products 6-15• Workshops (30 min.) 6-19

C. ANSYS Native Commands 6-20• Definitions 6-21

D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation 6-24• Working Plane 6 24

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

B. Plotting 4-3C. Picking 4-10D. Coordinate Systems 4-16E. Select Logic 4-21F. Components 4-28G. Workshop (15 min.) 4-31

• Working Plane 6-24E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems 6-30

• Active Coordinate System 6-30• Global Coordinate System 6-31• Local Coordinate System 6-32• Working Plane Coord. System 6-33

February 7, 2006Inventory #002268

TOC-3

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

7. Creating the Finite Element Model 7-1

(3:00pm – 6:00pm)A. Overview 7-2

9. Loading (Day 2: 9:00am – 9:30am) 9-1A. Define Loads 9-3B. Nodal Coordinate Systems 9-6C Displacement Constraints 9-11

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

A. Overview 7 2B. Element Attributes 7-4C. Multiple Element Attributes 7-29D. Workshop 7-36E. Controlling Mesh Density 7-37F. Mesh Order Control 7-46G Generating the Mesh 7-47

C. Displacement Constraints 9 11D. Concentrated Forces 9-12E. Verifying Loads 9-16

10. Solution (9:45am – 11:45am) 10-1A. Solvers 10-2B D fi iti 10 10

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

G. Generating the Mesh 7-47H. Changing a Mesh 7-49I. Mapped Meshing 7-52J. Hex-to-Tex Meshing 7-69K. Mesh Extrusion 7-77L. Sweep Meshing 7-82M F E Imports 7 88

B. Definitions 10-10C. Multiple Loadsteps 10-11D. Workshops (90 min.) 10-19

11. Structural Analysis (1:00pm – 2:30pm) 11-1A Preprocessing 11-3 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

M. F.E. Imports 7-88N. Workshops (90 min.) 7-89

Day 2

8. Defining the Material (8:00am – 9:00am) 8-1

A. Preprocessing 11-3B. Solution 11-5C. Postprocessing 11-17D. Workshops (45 min.) 11-25

12. Thermal Analysis (2:30pm – 3:30pm) 12-1 Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

g ( )A. Units 8-3B. ANSYS Defined Materials 8-4C. Material Model GUI 8-6D. Listing Defined Materials 8-11E. Workshops (30 min.) 8-12

y ( p p )A. Preprocessing 12-3B. Solution 12-5C. Postprocessing 12-15D. Workshop (30 min) 12-22


TOC-4

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

13. Postprocessing (4:00pm – 9:00am) 13-1A. Query Picking 13-3B. Results Coordinate System 13-6C. Path Operations 13-9

Appendix A-1A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation A-2

A. Definitions A-3B. Top-Down Modeling A-6

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

C. Path Operations 13 9D. Error Estimation 13-16E. Load Case Combinations 13-25F. Workshops 13-31G. Results Viewer 13-32H. Variable Viewer 13-40I Report Generator 13-43

p gC. Workshop A-22D. Bottom-Up Modeling A-23E. Workshops A-37F. Best Modeling Practices A-38

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

I. Report Generator 13-43J. Workshop (120 min.) 13-51

Day 3

14. Short Topics (9:00am – 10:30am) 14-1A T lb & Abb i i 14 3

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

A. Toolbar & Abbreviations 14-3B. Start File 14-9C. APDL 14-10D. Defining Parameters 14-11E. Using Parameters 14-15F. Retrieving Database Information 14-18 Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

G. Batch Mode 14-22H. Input Files 14-23I. Session Editor 14-28J. Workshops (30 min.) 14-30


TOC-5

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O1. Introduction 9. Loading OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

2. FEA and ANSYS

3. Getting Started

10. Solution

11. Structural Analysis ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

4. ANSYS Basics

5. General Analysis Procedure

12. Thermal Analysis

13. Postprocessing

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

6. Creating the Solid Model

7. Creating the Finite Element Model

14. Short Topics

Appendix Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

8. Defining the Material

(Slide shown for Hyperlinking to Chapters)


TOC-6


I d i ANSYS

Training Manual

Introduction to ANSYS Part 1Part 1

Training ManualIntroduction to ANSYS - Part 1

Inventory Number: 002268First Edition

ANSYS Release: 10.0Published Date: February 7, 2006

Registered Trademarks:ANSYS® is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveAll other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Disclaimer Notice:This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc. Documentation Review and Approval Procedures. “This ANSYS Inc. software product (the Program) and program documentation (Documentation) are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that License Agreement.”

Copyright © 2006 SAS IP IncCopyright © 2006 SAS IP, Inc.

Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.

All Rights Reserved.

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

1. Introduction 1-1

2. FEA and ANSYS 2-1A. About the Company 2-2

5. General Analysis Procedure 5-1A. Preliminary Decisions 5-5B. Preprocessing 5-8

• Create Solid Model 5-8 OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

B. About ANSYS 2-4C. What is FEA? 2-10D. Instructor Example 2-13E. Workshop 2-14

3. Getting Started 3-1

• Create FEA Model 5-10• Define Material 5-12

C. Solution 5-13• Define Loads 5-13

D. Postprocessing 5-15• Review Results 5-15

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

gA. Interactive vs Batch Mode 3-2B. Starting ANSYS 3-3C. Product Launcher 3-4D. ANSYS Workbench 3-9E. Memory 3-12F. GUI 3-15

• Verification 5-18

6. Creating the Solid Model 6-1A. What to Model? 6-3B. Importing Geometry 6-14

• IGES Imports 6-14 NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

F. GUI 3 15G. The Database and Files 3-37H. Exiting ANSYS 3-46I. On-Line Help 3-47J. Workshop 3-53

4. ANSYS Basics 4-1

IGES Imports 6 14• Connection Products 6-15• Workshops 6-19

C. ANSYS Native Commands 6-20• Definitions 6-21

D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation 6-24• Working Plane 6 24


4. ANSYS Basics 4 1A. Overview 4-2B. Plotting 4-3C. Picking 4-10D. Coordinate Systems 4-16E. Select Logic 4-21F Components 4-28

• Working Plane 6-24E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems 6-30

• Active Coordinate System 6-30• Global Coordinate System 6-31• Local Coordinate System 6-32• Working Plane Coord. System 6-33


TOC-3

F. Components 4-28G. Workshop 4-31

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

7. Creating the Finite Element Model 7-1A. Overview 7-2B. Element Attributes 7-4C. Multiple Element Attributes 7-29

9. Loading 9-1A. Define Loads 9-3B. Nodal Coordinate Systems 9-6C Displacement Constraints 9-11

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

C. Multiple Element Attributes 7 29D. Workshop 7-36E. Controlling Mesh Density 7-37F. Mesh Order Control 7-46G. Generating the Mesh 7-47H. Changing a Mesh 7-49I Mapped Meshing 7-52

C. Displacement Constraints 9 11D. Concentrated Forces 9-12E. Verifying Loads 9-16

10. Solution 10-1A. Solvers 10-2B D fi iti 10 10

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

I. Mapped Meshing 7-52J. Hex-to-Tex Meshing 7-69K. Mesh Extrusion 7-77L. Sweep Meshing 7-82M. F.E. Imports 7-88N. Workshops 7-89

B. Definitions 10-10C. Multiple Loadsteps 10-11D. Workshops 10-19

11. Structural Analysis 11-1A Preprocessing 11-3 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

8. Defining the Material 8-1A. Units 8-3B. ANSYS Defined Materials 8-4C. Material Model GUI 8-6D. Listing Defined Materials 8-11E W k h 8 12

A. Preprocessing 11-3B. Solution 11-5C. Postprocessing 11-17D. Workshops 11-25

12. Thermal Analysis 12-1 Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

E. Workshops 8-12y

A. Preprocessing 12-3B. Solution 12-5C. Postprocessing 12-15D. Workshop 12-22


TOC-4

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

13. Postprocessing 13-1A. Query Picking 13-3B. Results Coordinate System 13-6C. Path Operations 13-9

Appendix A-1A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation A-2

A. Definitions A-3B. Top-Down Modeling A-6

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

C. Path Operations 13 9D. Error Estimation 13-16E. Load Case Combinations 13-25F. Workshops 13-31G. Results Viewer 13-32H. Variable Viewer 13-40I Report Generator 13-43

p gC. Workshop A-22D. Bottom-Up Modeling A-23E. Workshops A-37F. Best Modeling Practices A-38

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

I. Report Generator 13-43J. Workshop 13-51

14. Short Topics 14-1A. Toolbar & Abbreviations 14-3B Start File 14 9

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

B. Start File 14-9C. APDL 14-10D. Defining Parameters 14-11E. Using Parameters 14-15F. Retrieving Database Information 14-18G. Batch Mode 14-22H I t Fil 14 23


H. Input Files 14-23I. Session Editor 14-28J. Workshops 14-30


TOC-5

Training Manual


Table of ContentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O1. Introduction 9. Loading OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

2. FEA and ANSYS

3. Getting Started

10. Solution

11. Structural Analysis ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

4. ANSYS Basics



13. Postprocessing

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP



14. Short Topics

Appendix Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1




TOC-6


Chapter 1

Introduction

Training Manual

Chapter 1 - Introduction

Welcome!IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Welcome to the Introduction to ANSYS Training Course!

Thi t i i th b i f h t ANSYS f

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• This training course covers the basics of how to use ANSYS for static or steady-state analyses.

• It is intended for all new or occasional ANSYS users regardless of ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

gactual ANSYS application.

• Several advanced training courses are available on specific topics See the training course schedule on the ANSYS

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

topics. See the training course schedule on the ANSYS homepage: www.ansys.com under “Training Services”.



1-2

Training Manual


Course ObjectivesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

j

To teach the basics of ANSYS in the following areas:

ANSYS biliti b i ANSYS t i l d th ANSYS GUI

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• ANSYS capabilities, basic ANSYS terminology, and the ANSYS GUI

• How to perform a complete ANSYS analysis… the basic steps involved O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Building or importing solid models and meshing

• Applying loads solving and reviewing results

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Applying loads, solving, and reviewing results

• Productivity enhancement tools -- select logic, APDL, batch mode, etc.



1-3

Training Manual


Course MaterialIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The Training Manual you have is an exact copy of the slides.

W k h d i ti d i t ti i l d d i th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Workshop descriptions and instructions are included in the Workshop Supplement.

• Copies of the workshop files are available (upon request) from the ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p p ( p q )instructor.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



1-4

Training Manual


Table of Contents Chapter LinksIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

1. Introduction

2 FEA d ANSYS

9. Loading

10 S l ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

2. FEA and ANSYS

3. Getting Started

4 ANSYS B i

10. Solution

11. Structural Analysis

12 Th l A l i

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

4. ANSYS Basics


6 C ti th S lid M d l


13. Postprocessing

14 Sh t T i

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP



8 D fi i th M t i l

14. Short Topics

Appendix





1-5


Chapter 2

FEA and ANSYS

Training Manual

Chapter 2 - FEA and ANSYS

A. About the CompanyIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

ANSYS, Inc. – Developer of ANSYS family of

d t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

products– Headquartered in Canonsburg, PA -

USA (south of Pittsburgh)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ANSYS Channel Partners– Sales and support network for ANSYS– Over 75 offices worldwide

L l ti f ANSYS lti

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Local expertise for ANSYS consulting and training



2-2

Training Manual


…About the CompanyIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

ANSYS Support Coordinator (ASC)– Contact for ANSYS at your company site O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Focal point for ANSYS correspondence; software updates, error notices, newsletter and other mailings, etc.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

For more information about ANSYS and the company:– www.ansys.com

• Where you’ll find the Customer Portal NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– On-line documentation– Training manuals from other ANSYS courses



2-3

Training Manual


B. About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

ANSYS, Inc. Family of Products include the following:

ANSYS Ad d li h i l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• ANSYS – Advanced nonlinear mechanical and multiphysics FEA solution capabilities

• ANSYS Workbench – Complete environment ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

pfor geometry modeling, mesh manipulation,structural/thermal analysis, and optimization,which is tightly integrated with CAD packages N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• CFX – State-of-the-art CFD solvers, including the coupled, parallel CFX-5 solver


• ICEM CFD – Powerful meshing tools with general pre- and post-processing features,including ICEM CFD for generating complexCFD grids and AI*Environment for creating


2-4

CFD grids and AI Environment for creatingwith sophisticated structural FEA meshes

Training Manual


…About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS is a complete FEA software package used by engineers worldwide in virtually all fields of engineering. Partial listing of the

biliti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

capabilities:– Structural

• Linear• Nonlinear

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Nonlinear – Material, Geometric, Contact

• DynamicsModal Harmonic Transient Dynamic Spectrum Random Vibration N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Modal, Harmonic, Transient Dynamic, Spectrum, Random Vibration– Explicit Dynamics with ANSYS LS-DYNA

– Thermal• Steady State and Transient Part 1


Steady State and Transient– Fluid (CFD, Acoustics, and other fluid analyses)– Low- and High-Frequency Electromagnetics– Coupled Field


2-5

Training Manual


…About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A partial list of industries in which ANSYS is used:– Aerospace O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Automotive– Biomedical– Bridges & Buildings

Electronics & Appliances

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Electronics & Appliances– Heavy Equipment & Machinery– MEMS - Micro Electromechanical Systems– Sporting Goods N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

p g



2-6

Training Manual


…About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS Multiphysics - Provides the analysis industry's most comprehensive coupled physics tool combining structural, thermal, CFD, acoustic and electromagnetic simulation capabilities into a single software product

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

simulation capabilities into a single software product.

• ANSYS Mechanical - Structural and Thermal analysis tool which includes a full complement of nonlinear and linear elements, material laws ranging from metal to rubber, and the most comprehensive set of solvers available. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• ANSYS Structural - Provides all the power of ANSYS nonlinear structural capabilities -- as well as linear capabilities -- to deliver the highest quality, most-reliable structural simulation results available. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• ANSYS Professional – Inexpensive, easy-to-use program for structural/thermal analysis projects.

• ANSYS DesignSpace – An easy-to-use package that gives designers the tool to Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

conceptualize, design and validate ideas right on the desktop.

• ANSYS LS-DYNA – Meets design challenges by fusing LSTC’s LS-DYNA explicit dynamic solver technology with the pre-/post-processing power of ANSYS software. This powerful pairing helps engineers understand the elaborate combinations of nonlinear


2-7

powerful pairing helps engineers understand the elaborate combinations of nonlinear phenomena found in crash tests, metal forging, stamping and catastrophic failures.

• ANSYS Emag – Addresses the analysis needs of the low-frequency electromagnetics market.

Training Manual


…About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Workbench Modules:

• DesignModeler – Workbench application that provides modeling functions unique for simulation that

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

g pp p g qinclude detailed geometry creation, CAD geometry modification, and concept model creation tool.

• DesignXplorer – Works within the Workbench environment to perform Design Of Experiments (DOE) analyses of any Workbench simulation, including those with CAD parameters.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y y , g p

• DesignXplorer VT – A robust Variational Technology solution that gives users a broader view of design concepts providing complete FEA results for every design point.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• ANSYS Fatigue – Adds the capability to simulate performance under anticipated cyclic loading conditions over anticipated product life span.



2-8

Training Manual


…About ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Other products:– ANSYS ICEM CFD – Provides sophisticated geometry acquisition, mesh O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

generation, post-processing and mesh optimization tools.

– ANSYS CFX – Suite of finite-volume-based Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) software, offered by CFX, an ANSYS, Inc. subsidiary including CFX-5, the best-in-class CFD software.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

CFD software.

– ANSYS ParaMesh – a tool that works directly on legacy models. The mesh, a tessellated representation, can be parameterized and made to move almost as though it were geometry, giving a legacy model incredible utility. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPPart 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


2-9

Training Manual


C. What is FEA?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Finite Element Analysis is a way to simulate loading conditions on a design and determine the design’s response to those conditions

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

conditions.

• The design is modeled using discrete building blocks called elements. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Each element has exact equations that describe how it responds to a certain load.

Historical Note

• The finite element method of structural analysis was created N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– The “sum” of the response of all elements in the model gives the total response of the design.

– The elements have a finite number

by academic and industrial researchers during the 1950s and 1960s.

• The underlying theory is over 100 years old and was the basis


The elements have a finite number of unknowns, hence the name finite elements.

100 years old, and was the basis for pen-and-paper calculations in the evaluation of suspension bridges and steam boilers.


2-10

Training Manual


…What is FEA?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The finite element model, which has a finite number of unknowns, can only approximate the response of the physical system, which h i fi it k

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

has infinite unknowns.– So the question arises: How good is the approximation?

– Unfortunately, there is no easy

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Unfortunately, there is no easy answer to this question. It depends entirely on what you are simulating and the tools you use for the simulation. We will, however, N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

simulation. We will, however, attempt to give you guidelines throughout this training course.


Physical System F.E. Model


2-11

Training Manual


…What is FEA?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Why is FEA needed?

T d th t f t t t ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To reduce the amount of prototype testing– Computer simulation allows multiple “what-if” scenarios to be tested

quickly and effectively. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• To simulate designs that are not suitable for prototype testing– Example: Surgical implants, such as an artificial knee

• The bottom line:

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The bottom line:– Cost savings– Time savings… reduce time to market!– Create more reliable, better-quality designs Part 1


Create more reliable, better quality designs


2-12

Training Manual


D. Instructor ExampleIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Your instructor is going to do a simple example so you get a feel for what you’re going to be learning. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The instructor will do the example through the GUI without going into any detail on how to generate the model.

The e ample is of a cantile er beam ith a load at the end

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• The example is of a cantilever beam with a load at the end.

• You will see that the deflection at the tip matches theory.→ δ = PL3/3EI = (-100)*(103)/(3)*(30e6)*(1/12) = -0.013 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Instructor cheat sheet:/prep7mp,ex,1,30e6mp nuxy 1 0 3

allsd,node(0,0.5,0),uyf node(10 1 0) fy 100


mp,nuxy,1,0.3et,1,plane42blc4,0,0,10,1amesh,allnsel,s,loc,x,0

f,node(10,1,0),fy,-100/solusolve/post1plns,u,y


2-13

d,all,ux

Training Manual


E. WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W2 Introductory Workshop O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



2-14

Chapter 3

Getting Started

Training Manual

Chapter 3 – Getting Started

A. Interactive vs BatchIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Two ways of working with ANSYS: Interactive and Batch Modes

Interacti e mode allo s o to interact “li e” ith ANSYS re ie ing

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Interactive mode allows you to interact “live” with ANSYS, reviewing each operation as you go.

– Of the three main phases of an analysis — preprocessing, solution, postprocessing — the preprocessing and postprocessing phases are best O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g g gsuited for interactive mode.

• Batch mode allows you to submit a batch file of commands which ANSYS runs in the background N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

ANSYS runs in the background.

• We will mainly cover interactive mode in this course.



3-2

Training Manual


B. Starting ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

gCommand Line Start-up

• Allows you to start ANSYS by entering a command at the system OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

y y g ylevel.

• Not discussed in this course, details can be found in the Operations Guide

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Guide.

Product Launcher NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Allows you to select and start ANSYS products and utilities.

• On Unix systems, issue launcher100 to bring up the launcher. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

y g p

• On Windows systems, press:– Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 > ANSYS Product Launcher


3-3

Training Manual


C. Product LauncherIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Launcher has four tabs: File Management, Customization/Preferences, Distributed Solver Setup, and MFX-ANSYS/CFX S t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

ANSYS/CFX Setup.• Launcher is used to

select the Simulation Environment (i e :

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Environment (i.e.: ANSYS, ANSYS Batch, ANSYS Workbench*, MFX - ANSYS/CFX, LS-

S )

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

DYNA Solver.)

• Available license and Add-on Modules are Part 1


Add on Modules are selected here.


3-4*To be discussed later

Training Manual


…Product LauncherIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• File Management Tab is OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

gused to specify the Working Directory (where all of your files will reside) and a Job Name

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

reside) and a Job Name of your choosing. The default Job Name is “file”. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-5

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Customization/Preferences tab allows you to set

ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

memory options, run a custom version of ANSYS, define parameters, set the language to be used by the O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g g yGraphical User Interface (GUI), and specify a Graphics Device (2D or 3D). N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• A customizable file called start100.ans can also be read at start-up. Part 1



3-6

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• Distributed Solver Setup tab is used to set up

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

tab is used to set up Parallel Performance solving options.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Other, more advanced options such as Distributed Processing are also selected here N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

are also selected here..



3-7

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• MFX - ANSYS/CFX Setup tab is used to set up ANSYS Multi-

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

set up ANSYS Multi-field solving options for ANSYS and CFX.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-8

Training Manual


D. ANSYS WorkbenchIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Quick note about the ANSYS Workbench... O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-9

Training Manual


...ANSYS WorkbenchIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

ANSYS Workbench has been developed to make the following Workbench technology strengths available to traditional ANSYS users: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• CAD Associativity

– Plug-In architecture used to maintain associativity with the CAD systems for solid and surface models, allowing you to make design changes to your CAD model without having to reapply any of the loads and or supports. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y y

• Bi-Directional Associativity

– Provides control of your key CAD model parameter in the Workbench parameter manager.

• Parameter management driving DOE optimization NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Parameter management driving DOE optimization

– Ability to control both simulation parameters - such as material properties, force direction, and temperature - as well as CAD parameters.

• Web-Based Engineering Report Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– Automatically captures engineering info and publishes it in a web based HTML document.

• Robust automatic meshing capabilities

• Automatic contact recognition


3-10

• True Engineering Wizard

Training Manual


...ANSYS Workbench IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Supported Analyses include:– Static Structural Analysis O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Linear, Nonlinear Contact, Nonlinear Geometry, Nonlinear Material– Steady-State and Transient Thermal Analysis– Harmonic Analysis

Modal Analysis

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Modal Analysis

• ANSYS commands can be used within Workbench.

Th Fi i El M d l b f d h ANSYS

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The Finite Element Model can be transferred to the ANSYS Environment.

• ANSYS Workbench is covered in detail in a separate training Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

ANSYS Workbench is covered in detail in a separate training course (Workbench – Simulation Introduction).


3-11

Training Manual


E. Memory OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

• ANSYS Executable memory is the memory required for the ANSYS program. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• ANSYS Workspace is the memory ANSYS requires to run in addition to the ANSYS Executable memory. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Real memory is the amount of actual, physical memory (RAM) available through memory chips on your machine.

• System virtual memory is simply a portion of the computer's hard

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• System virtual memory is simply a portion of the computer s hard disk used by the system to supplement physical memory.



3-12

Training Manual


…Memory DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y• Workspace space (i.e –m ) is the memory ANSYS needs to run.

Default is 512 MB on Windows and UNIX machines. OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Database space (i.e. –db) is used to work with the ANSYS database. For example, model geometry, material properties, loads, etc. Defaults to 256MB on Windows and UNIX machines. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Scratch space is where all internal calculations are done. For example, element matrix formulation, frontal solution, Boolean calculations and so on N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

calculations, and so on.


S t h W k D t b


3-13

Scratch space = Workspace - Database

Training Manual


…ANSYS Memory ManagerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y g

• ANSYS Memory Manager will be used when ‘Use custom memory settings’ is unchecked on the Customization/Preferences tab of the P d h

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Product Launcher.– When the ANSYS Memory Manager is specified, ANSYS will allocate

more memory from the system when it is needed.– When custom memory settings are specified, no more memory can be

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

When custom memory settings are specified, no more memory can be accessed and the specified memory can not be released for other tasks.

• In general you shouldn’t worry about memory management in NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• In general, you shouldn t worry about memory management in ANSYS. The ANSYS Memory Manager will do the job for you. However, there are exceptions when you will need set the Total Workspace. Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• See Chapter 19 of the Basic Analysis Guide for more details on

Memory Management and Configuration.


3-14

Training Manual


F. GUI - Layout Utility Menu

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

y

Output Window

Icon Toolbar Menu Input Line Raise/Hidden Icon

Contact Manager Icon

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Abbreviation Toolbar Menu

Command Window Icon

Model Control Toolbar O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Graphics AreaMain Menu

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


Current SettingsUser Prompt Info


3-15

Training Manual


…GUI - LayoutIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Fonts of the layout can be customized:– Windows System

Utilit M M Ct l F t S l ti

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Utility Menu > Menu Ctrls > Font Selection...– Unix system:

• Common Desktop Environment (CDE) uses the system settings• Otherwise (e g a telnet to a Unix Machine) uses the ~/ Xdefaults settings

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Otherwise (e.g. a telnet to a Unix Machine) uses the ~/.Xdefaults settings– *EUIDL*Font: Times 12 normal– *EUIDL*Background: purple

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The GUI has been modularized using the Tcl/Tk language which allows for dialog boxes, ANSYS messages, etc. to be easily changed to a country’s native language. Part 1



3-16

Training Manual


…GUI - Graphics WindowIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• Display location of model entities, postprocessing contours, and postprocessing graphs. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

p p g g p

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Graphics Area



3-17

Training Manual


…GUI - Main MenuIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Tree structure format.

C t i th i f ti i d f

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Contains the main functions required for an analysis.

• Use scroll bar to gain access to long tree ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g gstructures.

• Colors used to show tree level. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

scroll bar



3-18

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OBefore collapsing Preprocessor Branch After expanding Preprocessor Branch • Tree structure behavior – sub branch preserved

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

p g p

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Select to collapse Preprocessor Branch N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


The tree structure is the same before


3-19

and after the Preprocessor branch of Main Menu is collapsed

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OPosition mouse cursor on branch of Main

• Expand all option

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Menu – then select right mouse button

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

The option to expand the branch is displayed Part 1


Selecting “Expand All” expands th b h t t


3-20

the branch contents

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

ORight Click in Main Menu and select “Preferences”

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

and select Preferences .

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Level color, filtering and expansion of Main Menu can be changed. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-21

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

With “Expand headings” and “Collapse siblings” behavior active … O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOCreating a Volume branch open ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


When the Delete branch is opened, the Create branch is closed

Note, inactivate “Collapse siblings” to


3-22

, p gkeep open the Create branch

Training Manual


…GUI - Main Menu Filtered BranchesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Main Menu with structural and thermal element type defined

Main Menu with only thermal element type defined O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


Only “Apply” branches shown are those for defined element types


3-23

Training Manual


…GUI - Abbreviation Toolbar MenuIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Contains abbreviations -- short-cuts to commonly used commands and functions. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• A few predefined abbreviations are available, but you can add your own. Requires knowledge of ANSYS commands. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• A powerful feature which you can use to create your own “button menu” system!

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-24

Training Manual


…GUI - Icon Toolbar MenuIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Contains icons of commonly used functions.

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Can be customized by the user (i.e adding icons, additional toolbars)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Pan-Zoom-RotateSave Analysis

Image Capture NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Open ANSYS FileImage Capture

Report Generator

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1New Analysis ANSYS Help


3-25

Training Manual


…GUI - Icon Toolbar MenuIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Jobname definition when using Open ANSYS File Icon:– the ANSYS jobname will be changed to the prefix of the database file being resumed. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Open ANSYS File

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

When opening the “blades.db” database (using the Open ANSYS File Icon), the jobname will be changed to “blades”.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


The Open ANSYS File Icon can be used to open either ANSYS


3-26

Database or ANSYS Command file types

Training Manual


…GUI - Raise/Hidden IconIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The Raise/Hidden Icon can be used to “bring to the front” any hidden ANSYS created windows (except the output window). O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOSelect Raise/ Hidden Icon ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Select Raise/ Hidden Icon

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Pan/Zoom/Rotate Widget Hidden


Pan/Zoom/Rotate Widget Shown


3-27

Training Manual


…GUI - Input WindowIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Allows you to enter commands. (Most GUI functions actually “send” commands to ANSYS. If you know these commands, you O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

can type them in the Input Window).

• As a command is typed, the format of the command is dynamically displayed.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

dynamically displayed.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Click on the X to return the input to the toolbar.

Clicking on the ANSYS Command Window Icon

th i t li t


moves the input line to a separate command window, which can be moved around the screen.


3-28

Training Manual


…GUI - Input WindowIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

List of issued commands• Reissuing commands:

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Use scroll bar to gain access to all commands issued

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANSelect down arrow to seeCommands can be reissued by double-

li ki th li t d d

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Select down arrow to see list of issued commandsclicking on the listed command

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1The up and down arrows on the keyboard can be

used to select different listed commands


3-29

Training Manual


…GUI - Utility MenuIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Contains utilities that are generally available throughout the ANSYS session: graphics, on-line help, select logic, file controls,

t

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

etc.

• Conventions used in Utility Menu:– “ ” indicates a dialog box

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

… indicates a dialog box– “ +” indicates graphical picking– “ >” indicates a submenu– “ ” (blank) indicates an action N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

(blank) indicates an action



3-30

Training Manual


…GUI - Current SettingsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• The current element attributes settings, and currently active coordinate system are displayed at the bottom on the GUI. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-31

Element Attributes Active Coordinate System

Training Manual


…GUI - User prompt infoIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Instructions to the user are displayed in the lower left hand area of the GUI. The user will be given user prompt info for operations

h i ki ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

such as picking operations.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-32

User Prompt Info

Training Manual


…GUI - Output WindowIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The output window gives the user feedback on how ANSYS interpreted the user’s input. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The Output Window is independent of the ANSYS menus. Caution: Closing the output window closes the entire ANSYS session! O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Note: The output can be sent to a file using the /OUTPUT command.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Able to verify the ANSYS version



3-33

Training Manual


…GUI - PreferencesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The Preferences dialog (Main Menu > Preferences) allows you to filter out

h i th t t li bl t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

menu choices that are not applicable to the current analysis.

• For example, if you are doing a thermal l i h t filt t

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

analysis, you can choose to filter out other disciplines, thereby reducing the number of menu items available in the GUI: N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Only thermal element types will be shown in the element type selection dialog.

– Only thermal loads will be shown.– Etc. Part 1



3-34

Training Manual


…GUI – Other NotesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Other GUI Notes

S di l b h b th A l d OK b tt

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Some dialog boxes have both Apply and OK buttons.– Apply applies the dialog settings, but retains (does not close) the

dialog box for repeated use.– OK applies the dialog settings and closes the dialog box. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

pp g g g

• Remember that you are not restricted to using the menus. If you know the command, feel free to enter it in the Input Window! N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• The output window is not affected by the Raise/Hidden Button. For convenience, the user may want to resize the GUI, so part of the output window is displayed to allow easy access. Part 1



3-35

Training Manual


…GUI - DemoIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Start ANSYS using the ANSYS Product Launcher O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Show the various parts of the GUI– Bring up “Keypoints in Active CS” dialog box and show the difference

between OK and Apply– Show the Preferences dialog

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Show the Preferences dialog– Explain the Output window– Show the use of the Raise/Hidden Icon– Explain the Main Menu behavior N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-36

Training Manual


G. The Database and FilesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The term ANSYS database refers to the data ANSYS maintains in memory as you build, solve, and postprocess your model. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The database stores both your input data and some results data:– Input data -- information you must enter, such as model dimensions,

material properties, and load data. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p p ,– Results data -- a set of quantities that ANSYS calculates, such as

displacements, stresses, strains, and reaction forces.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-37

Training Manual


…The Database and FilesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Save and Resume

Si th d t b i t d i th t ’ (RAM) it

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Since the database is stored in the computer’s memory (RAM), it is good practice to save it to disk frequently so that you can restore the information in the event of a computer crash or power failure. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• The SAVE operation copies the database from memory to a file called the database file (or db file for short).

Th i t t d i t li k T lb > SAVE DB

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– The easiest way to do a save is to click on Toolbar > SAVE_DB– Or use:

• Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db• Utility Menu > File > Save as


• Utility Menu > File > Save as…• SAVE command


3-38

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To restore the database from the db file back into memory, use the RESUME operation. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Toolbar > RESUME_DB– Or use:

• Utility Menu > File > Resume Jobname.dbUtilit M > Fil > R f

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Utility Menu > File > Resume from…• RESUME command

• The default file name for SAVE and RESUME is jobname.db, but NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

j ,you can choose a different name by using the “Save as” or “Resume from” functions.



3-39

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Notes on SAVE and RESUME:– Choosing the “Save as” or “Resume from” function does NOT change

th t j b

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

the current jobname.– If you save to the default file name and a jobname.db already exists,

ANSYS will first copy the “old” file to jobname.dbb as a back-up. Note, ANSYS only supports one backup file (i.e. jobname.dbb). O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– The db file is simply a “snapshot” of what is in memory at the time the save is done.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-40

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Tips on SAVE and RESUME:– Periodically save the database as you progress through an analysis.

ANSYS d NOT d t ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

ANSYS does NOT do automatic saves.– You should SAVE the database before attempting an unfamiliar

operation (such as a Boolean or meshing) or an operation that may cause major changes (such as a delete). O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• RESUME can then be used as an “undo” if you don’t like the results of that operation.

– SAVE is also recommended before doing a solve. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-41

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Clearing the Database

Th Cl D t b ti ll

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The Clear Database operation allows you to “zero out” the database and start fresh. It is similar to exiting and re-entering ANSYS. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New– Or use the /CLEAR command.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-42

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Files

ANSYS it d d l fil d i l i Fil

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• ANSYS writes and reads several files during an analysis. File names are of the format jobname.ext.

• Jobname ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– A name you choose while starting ANSYS, up to 32 characters. Defaults to file.

– Can be changed within ANSYS with the /FILNAME command (Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

File > Change Jobname).

• Extension– Identifies the contents of the file, such as .db for database. Part 1


– Usually assigned by ANSYS but can be defined by user (/ASSIGN).


3-43

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Typical files:jobname.log: Log file, ASCII. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Contains a log of every command issued during the session.• If you start a second session with the same jobname in the same

working directory, ANSYS will append to the previous log file (with a time stamp)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

a time stamp).jobname.err: Error file, ASCII.

• Contains all errors and warnings encountered during the session. ANSYS will also append to an existing error file. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

jobname.db, .dbb: Database file, binary.• Compatible across all supported platforms.

jobname.rst, .rth, .rmg, .rfl: Results files, binary.C i l d l l d b ANSYS d i l i


• Contains results data calculated by ANSYS during solution.• Compatible across all supported platforms.


3-44

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

File Management Tips

• Run each analysis project in a separate working directory. OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

y p j p g y

• Use different jobnames to differentiate various analysis runs.

• You should keep the following files after any ANSYS analysis:– log file ( .log)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

og e ( og)– database file ( .db)– results files (.rst, .rth, …)– load step files, if any (.s01, .s02, ...)– physics files (.ph1, .ph2, ...) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Use /FDELETE or Utility Menu > File > ANSYS File Options to automatically delete files no longer needed by ANSYS during that session.

A t ANSYS Fil i


• A note on ANSYS File sizes:– The maximum size of an ANSYS file depends on the system limit and on the

ability of ANSYS to handle large files on that system. Most computer systems now handle very large files without any need for the automatic file splitting option that is provided in ANSYS. See the Operations Guide for system


3-45

p p p yspecifics.

Training Manual


H. Exiting ANSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Three ways to exit ANSYS:– Toolbar > QUIT

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Utility Menu > File > Exit– Use the /EXIT command in the Input Window

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-46

Training Manual


I. On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS uses an on-line documentation system to provide extensive help. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• You can get help on:– ANSYS commands– element types

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

element types– analysis procedures– special GUI “widgets” such as Pan-Zoom-Rotate

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• You can also access:– Tutorials– Verification models

The ANSYS web site


– The ANSYS web site


3-47

Training Manual


…On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are several ways to start the help system:– Launcher > Product Help O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Utility Menu > Help > Help Topics– Any dialog box > Help– Type HELP,name in the Input Window. Name is a command or

element name

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

element name.– On a PC, Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 > Help > ANSYS Help

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-48

Training Manual


…On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Pressing the Product Help button on the launcher brings up a help browser with:

– a navigational window containing Table of Contents Index and a Search Utility

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

a navigational window containing Table of Contents, Index, and a Search Utility– a document window containing the help information.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-49

Training Manual


…On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• Use the Contents tab to browse to the item of interest. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Use the Index tab to quickly locate specific commands, terminology, concepts, etc. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Use the Search tab to query the entire help system for specific words or phrases. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-50

Training Manual


…On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OOD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• ANSYS also provides an HTML-based on-line tutorial.

The tutorial consists of

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• The tutorial consists of detailed instructions for a set of problems solved in ANSYS. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• To access the tutorial, click on Utility Menu > Help > ANSYS Tutorials.



3-51

Training Manual


…On-Line HelpIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Launch the help system from the launcher O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Bring up an Analysis Guide– Type “help,kplot” in the Input window– Search for the string “harmonic response” O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



3-52

Training Manual


J. WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W3 Getting Started Workshop O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



3-53

Chapter 4

ANSYS Basics

Training Manual

Chapter 4 - ANSYS Basics

A. OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Later in this course you will be using geometrical entities such as volumes, areas, lines and keypoints as well as FEA entities such as

d d l t Thi h t i t d th f ll i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

nodes and elements. This chapter introduces the following techniques used to display and manipulate those entities within the GUI:

– Plotting

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Plotting– Picking – Coordinate Systems– Select Logic N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Components and Assemblies



4-2

Training Manual


B. PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• It is often advantageous to plot only certain entities in the model.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Within the Utility Menu > Plot, you will see that geometric, finite element and other entities can be plotted.

/replotkplot

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p

• With Multi-Plots, a combination of entities can be plotted.

kplotlplot

aplotvplotnplot N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

peplotgplot



4-3

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The PlotCtrls menu is used to control how the plot is displayed:

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– plot orientation– zoom– colors

symbols

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– symbols– annotation– animation– etc. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Among these, changing the plot orientation (/VIEW) and zooming are the most commonly used functions


most commonly used functions.


4-4

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The default view for a model is the front view: looking down the +Z axis of the model. There are several methods to change the model view

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

are several methods to change the model view.

• Use dynamic mode — a way to orient the plot dynamically using the Control key and mouse buttons

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

buttons.– Ctrl + Left mouse button pans the model.– Ctrl + Middle mouse button:

zooms the modelc NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

spins the model (about screen Z)– Ctrl + Right mouse button rotates the model:

about screen Xabout screen Y

P Z R

⇔

c

⇔ Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

Note, the Shift-Right button on a two-button mouse is equivalent to the Middle mouse

P Z RCtrl


4-5

ouse s equ a e t to t e dd e ousebutton on a three-button mouse.

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• Use the Model Control Toolbar Icons to

h th i

Model Control Toolbar

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

change the view.

• The Model Control Toolbar also includes O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

a dynamic rotate option.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


Dynamic Model Mode Icon performs same function as CTRL key.


4-6

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A Dynamic Mode setting is also available using Pan-Zoom-Rotate .

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– The same mouse button assignments apply.

– On 3-D graphics devices, you can also dynamically orient the light source. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y y gUseful for different light source shading effects.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

When using 3-D driver



4-7

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Other functions in the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box:

Front +Z view, from (0,0,1)Back -Z view (0,0,-1)T Y i (0 1 0)

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Preset views– Zoom-in on specific regions of

the model– Pan, zoom, or rotate in

Top +Y view (0,1,0)Bot -Y view (0,-1,0)Right +X view (1,0,0)Left -X view (-1,0,0)Iso Isometric (1,1,1) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Pan, zoom, or rotate in discrete increments (as specified by the Rate slider)

• Rotation is about the screen X Y Z coordinates

Obliq Oblique (1,2,3)WP Working plane view

Z B i ki t f

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

screen X, Y, Z coordinates.– Fit the plot to the window– Reset everything to default

Zoom By picking center of a square

Box Zoom By picking two corners of a box

Win Zoom Same as Box Zoom, b t b i ti l


• The majority of these options are available in the Model Control Toolbar.

but box is proportional to window.

Back Up “Unzoom” to previous zoom.


4-8

Training Manual


…PlottingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Many of the plotting features are also available by right mouse clicking on the graphics window.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



4-9

Training Manual


C. PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Picking

Pi ki ll t id tif d l titi

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Picking allows you to identify model entities or locations by clicking in the Graphics Window. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• A picking operation typically involves the use of the mouse and a picker menu. It is indicated by a + sign on the menu. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• For example, you can create keypoints by picking locations in the Graphics Window and then pressing OK in the picker. Part 1



4-10

Training Manual


…PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Two types of picking:

R t i l i ki

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Retrieval picking– Picking existing entities for a

subsequent operation.– Allows you to enter entity numbers

Example ofLocational Picker

Example ofRetrieval Picker

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y yin the Picker Window.

– Use the Pick All button to indicate all entities. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Locational picking– Locating coordinates of a point,

such as a keypoint or node. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– Allows you to enter coordinates in the Picker Window.

• Note, you must hit the <Enter> key


4-11

after entering information in the Picker Window, then hit [OK] or [Apply].

Training Manual


…PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Mouse button assignments for picking:

• Left mouse button picks (or unpicks) the entity

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Left mouse button picks (or unpicks) the entity or location closest to the mouse pointer. Pressing and dragging allows you to “preview” the item being picked (or unpicked). Apply

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Middle mouse button does an Apply. Saves the time required to move the mouse over to the Picker and press the Apply button. Use Shift-Right button on a two-button mouse

Pick TogglePick / Unpick

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Right button on a two-button mouse.

• Right mouse button toggles between pick and unpick mode. Part 1


Note, the Shift-Right button on a two-button mouse is equivalent to the Middle mouse button on a three-button mouse.


4-12UnpickPick

Cursor display:

Training Manual


…PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Cannot use the Command Input area to enter the values

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


Type input followed by Enter, then [OK]


4-13Prompt area indicates expected items

Training Manual


…PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Hotspot locations for picking:

A d V l h h t t th t id f th

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Areas and Volumes have one hotspot near the centroid of the solid model entity.

• Lines have three hotspots - one in the middle and one near each ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

pend.

• Why this is important: When you are required to “pick” an entity you must pick on the hotspot

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

entity, you must pick on the hotspot.



4-14

Training Manual


…PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Show locational picking by creating a few keypoints. Also show the

f iddl d i ht b tt

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

use of middle and right mouse buttons.– Show retrieval picking by creating a few lines– Show “Loop” by creating an AL area– Show “Pick All” by deleting area only

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Show Pick All by deleting area only– Do KPLOT, LPLOT, etc. with and without numbering. Type in a few of

these commands.– Show the use of pan-zoom-rotate N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



4-15

Training Manual


D. Coordinate SystemsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

The ANSYS program has several types of coordinate systems, each used for a different reason:

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Global and local coordinate systems are used to locate geometry items (nodes, keypoints, etc.) in space.

• The display coordinate system determines the system in which geometry items are listed or displayed

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

geometry items are listed or displayed.

• The nodal coordinate system defines the degree of freedom directions at each node and the orientation of nodal results data. (discussed in Chapter 9) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• The element coordinate system determines the orientation of material properties and element results data.

• The results coordinate system is used to transform nodal or Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

element results data to a particular coordinate system for listings, displays, or general postprocessing operations. (discussed in Chapter 13)


4-16

Training Manual


...Coordinate SystemsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Global Coordinate System

Th l b l f t f th d l

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The global reference system for the model.

• May be Cartesian (system 0), cylindrical (1), or spherical (2).– For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as (10,90,0) in global Cylindrical.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



4-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Local Coordinate System

A d fi d t t d i d l ti ith ID

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• A user-defined system at a desired location, with ID number 11 or greater. The location may be:

– At WP origin [CSWP]– At specified coordinates [LOCAL]

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

At specified coordinates [LOCAL]– At existing keypoints [CSKP] or nodes [CS]

• May be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• May be rotated about X, Y, Z axes.


YY11

X12Y12


4-18

XX11

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Display Coordinate System

C b h d t h d li t titi i lti l di t

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Can be changed to show and list entities in multiple coordinate systems

• Default is Global Cartesian ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Used mostly for listing and plotting models in non-Cartesian systems. Is useful in only a few cases:

If li d i di l d i it li d i l di t t ( ith 1 0 0

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– If a cylinder is displayed in its cylindrical coordinate system (with a 1,0,0 view), it will be unrolled (developed) into a flat plane (with theta along the Y direction).

– DSYS,1 - List nodal coordinates in r,theta,z Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


4-19

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Active Coordinate System

• Defaults to global Cartesian

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Defaults to global Cartesian.

• Use CSYS command (or Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to) to change it to

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

to– global Cartesian [csys,0]– global cylindrical [csys,1]– global spherical [csys 2] N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

global spherical [csys,2]– working plane [csys,4]– [csys,5] cylindrical coordinate system with Y as

the axis (X is in the global +X direction, local Y i i th l b l Z di ti d l l Z (th


is in the global -Z direction, and local Z (the cylindrical axis) is in the global +Y direction)

– or a user-defined local coordinate system [csys, n]


4-20

• Used for geometry input and generation and Select Logic (discussed next)

Training Manual


E. Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Suppose you wanted to do the following:– Plot all areas located in the second quadrant

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Delete all arcs of radius 0.2 to 0.3 units– Apply a convection load on all exterior lines– Write out all nodes at Z=3.5 to a file

View results only in elements made of steel

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– View results only in elements made of steel

The common “theme” in these tasks is that they all operate on a subset of the model. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Select Logic allows you to select a subset of entities and operate only on those entities. Part 1



4-21

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Three steps:– Select a subset

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Perform operations on the subset– Reactivate the full set

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPPart 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Select subset

Operate on subset


4-22

Reactivate full set

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Selecting Subsets

M t l ti t l Entity to select

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Most selecting tools are available in the Select Entitiesdialog box: Utility Menu > Select > Entities...

y

Criterion bywhich to select

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Or you can use the xSEL family of commands: KSEL, LSEL ASEL VSEL NSEL

which to select

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

LSEL, ASEL, VSEL, NSEL, ESEL Type of

selection



4-23

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Criterion by which to select:– By Num/Pick: to select based on entity numbers or by

i ki

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

picking– Attached to: to select based on attached entities. For

example, select all lines attached to the current subset of areas. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– By Location: to select based on X,Y,Z location. For example, select all nodes at X=2.5. X,Y,Z are interpreted in the active coordinate system.

– By Attributes: to select based on material number, real NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

By Attributes: to select based on material number, real constant set number, etc. Different attributes are available for different entities.

– Exterior: to select entities lying on the exterior.B R lt t l t titi b lt d t d l


– By Results: to select entities by results data, e.g, nodal displacements.


4-24

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Type of selection– From Full: selects a subset from

th f ll t f titi

g

F F ll

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

the full set of entities.– Reselect: selects (again) a subset

from the current subset.– Also Select: adds another subset

Reselect

From Full

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

to the current subset.– Unselect: deactivates a portion of

the current subset.Invert: toggles the active and

Also Select

Unselect NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Invert: toggles the active and inactive subsets.

– Select None: deactivates the full set of entities.

Invert


– Select All: reactivates the full set of entities.

Select None

Select All


4-25

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Operations on the Subset

T i l ti l i l d li ti

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Typical operations are applying loads, listing results for the subset, or simply plotting the selected entities.

– The advantage of having a subset selected is that

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

The advantage of having a subset selected is that you can use the [Pick All] button when the picker prompts you pick desired entities. Or you can use the ALL label when using commands.

– Note that most operations in ANSYS including the NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Note that most operations in ANSYS, including the SOLVE command, act on the currently selected subset.

• Another “operation” is to assign a name to the


• Another “operation” is to assign a name to the selected subset by creating a component(discussed in the next section).


4-26

Training Manual


…Select LogicIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Reactivating the Full Set

Aft ll d i d ti d th l t d b t

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• After all desired operations are done on the selected subset, you should reactivate the full set of entities.

– If all nodes and all elements are not active for solution, the solver will issue a warning to that effect. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g

• The easiest way to reactivate the full set is to select “everything”:– Utility Menu > Select > Everything

O i th d ALLSEL

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Or issue the command ALLSEL

You can also use the [Sele All] button in the Select Entities dialog box to reactivate each entity set separately. (Or issue KSEL,ALL; Part 1


y p y ( , ;LSEL,ALL; etc.)


4-27

Training Manual


F. ComponentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Components are user-named subsets of entities. The name can then be used in dialog boxes or commands in place of entity numbers or the label ALL

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

numbers or the label ALL.

• A group of nodes, or elements, or keypoints, or lines, or areas, or volumes can be defined as a component. Only one entity type is associated with a component

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

associated with a component.

• Components can be selected or unselected. When you select a component, you are actually selecting all of the entities in that

t

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

component.

• Component Manager is used to Create, Display, List and Select Components and A bli


Assemblies.– Utility Menu > Select > Component Manager...


4-28

Training Manual


…ComponentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Creating a component– Utility Menu > Select > Component Manager

Click on the Create Component Icon

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Click on the Create Component Icon• All of the currently selected entities will be included in the component, or you

can select (pick) the desired entities at this step.• Enter a name O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Up to 32 characters - letters, numbers, and _ (underscore) - are allowed– Beginning a component with _ (underscore) will make it a “hidden

component” and it cannot be picked from the list. This is NOT recommended. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Suggestion: Use the first letter of the name to indicate the entity type. For example, use N_HOLES for a node component.



4-29

Training Manual


…ComponentsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Creating an assembly– Highlight the components for the assembly

Click on the Create Assembly Icon and enter a name

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Click on the Create Assembly Icon and enter a name– Checking the box next to a component under the assembly number will also put a

component in an assembly

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPPart 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• In the Component Manager above, N_OUTER and N_INNER are in the

ASSM_NODES (ASM1) assembly. ASSM_NODES is in the ASSM_2 (ASM2) assembly.


4-30

Training Manual


G. WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:WS4 ANSYS Basics O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



4-31

Chapter 5

General Analysis Procedure

Training Manual

Chapter 5 - General Analysis Procedure

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• The objective of this chapter is outline a general analysis procedure to be used to solve a simulation. Regardless of O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

procedure to be used to solve a simulation. Regardless of the physics of the problem, the same general procedure can be followed.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• The problem on the following slide will be used to demonstrate the general analysis procedure.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



5-2

Training Manual


…OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Given: A 1” thick spherical aluminum tank with a height of 180” and radius of 100” tank is filled with water to a height of 80”. The l i ti E 10E6 P i 0 3

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

aluminum properties are E = 10E6 Psi, ν = 0.3.

100 “

A

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

1 “100 “100 “ A

Section Definition NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP80 “ 3163279.1

inlbf

=ρmσ

cσ Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

Stress ConventionSection A-A


5-3

Question: Predict the membrane stress distributions in the meridional (σm) and circumferential (σc) directions?

Stress Convention

Training Manual


…OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Every analysis involves four main steps:

• Preliminary Decisions

Preliminary Decisions O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Preliminary Decisions– Which analysis type?– What to model?– Which element type?

Decisions

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Preprocessing– Define Material– Create or import the model geometry

M h th t

Preprocessing

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Mesh the geometry

• Solution– Apply loads Solution Part 1


– Solve

• Postprocessing– Review results


5-4

– Check the validity of the solution Postprocessing

Training Manual

Chapter 5 - A. Preliminary Decisions

Which analysis type?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y y

• The analysis type usually belongs to one of the following disciplines: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Structural Motion of solid bodies, pressure on solid bodies, or contact of solid bodies

Thermal Applied heat, high temperatures, or changes in temperature ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

pElectromagnetic Devices subjected to electric currents (AC or DC),

electromagnetic waves, and voltage or charge excitation

Fluid Motion of gases/fluids or contained gases/fluids NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Fluid Motion of gases/fluids, or contained gases/fluidsCoupled-Field Combinations of any of the above

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1•The appropriate analysis type for this model is a structural analysis!


5-5

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What should be used to model the geometry of the spherical tank?– Axisymmetry since the loading, material, and the boundary O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

conditions are symmetric. This type of model would provide the most simplified model.

– Rotational symmetry since the loading, material, and the boundary conditions are symmetric Advantage over

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

boundary conditions are symmetric. Advantage over axisymmetry: offers some results away from applied boundary conditions.

– Full 3D model is an option, but would not be an efficient choice NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

p ,compared to the axisymmetric and quarter symmetry models. If model results are significantly influenced by symmetric boundary conditions, this may be the only option. Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1An axisymmetric and a one-quarter symmetry (i.e. rotational

symmetry) model will be analyzed for this model!


5-6

Training Manual


…Which Element Type?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

• What element type should be used for the model of the spherical tank? O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Axisymmetric model:• Axisymmetric since 2-D section can be revolved to created 3D

geometry.• Linear due to small displacement assumption

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Linear due to small displacement assumption.– PLANE42 with KEYOPT(3) = 1

– Rotational symmetry model:• Shell since radius/thickness ratio > 10 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Shell since radius/thickness ratio 10• Linear due to small displacement assumption.• membrane stiffness only option since “membrane stresses” are

required. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– SHELL63 with KEYOPT(1) = 1• Since the meshing of this geometry will create SHELL63 elements

with shape warnings, a mid-side noded equation of the SHELL63 was used:


5-7

used:– SHELL93

Training Manual

Chapter 5 - B. Preprocessing

…Create the Solid ModelIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A typical solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines, and keypoints. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Volumes are bounded by areas. They represent solid objects.– Areas are bounded by lines. They represent faces of solid objects, or

planar or shell objects.– Lines are bounded by keypoints. They represent edges of objects.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Lines are bounded by keypoints. They represent edges of objects.– Keypoints are locations in 3-D space. They represent vertices of

objects.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


Volumes Areas Lines & KeypointsFebruary 7, 2006

Inventory #0022685-8

Volumes Areas Lines & Keypoints

Training Manual


…Create the Solid ModelIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What geometry should be used to model the spherical tank?

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



5-9

One-quarter Symmetry ModelAxisymmetric model

Training Manual


Create the FEA ModelIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Meshing is the process used to “fill” the solid model with nodes and elements, i.e, to create the FEA model. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Remember, you need nodes and elements for the finite element solution, not just the solid model. The solid model does NOT participate in the finite element solution.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

meshing

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Solid model FEA model

meshing


5-10

Training Manual


…Create the FEA ModelIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What would the mesh of the spherical tank look like?

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



5-11


Training Manual


Define MaterialIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Material Properties

E l i i t i l t i t Y ’

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Every analysis requires some material property input: Young’s modulus EX for structural elements, thermal conductivity KXX for thermal elements, etc. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• There are two ways to define material properties:– Material library– Individual properties N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



5-12

Training Manual

Chapter 5 – C. Solution

Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are five categories of loads:DOF Constraints Specified DOF values, such as displacements

i t l i t t i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

in a stress analysis or temperatures in a thermal analysis.

Concentrated Loads Point loads, such as forces or heat flow rates.Surface Loads Loads distributed over a surface, such as O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

,pressures or convections.

Body Loads Volumetric or field loads, such as temperatures (causing thermal expansion) or internal heat generation. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

generation.Inertia Loads Loads due to structural mass or inertia, such

as gravity and rotational velocity.



5-13

Training Manual

Chapter 5 – C. Solution

…Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OEdge Symmetry T ti l

• What are the loads on the spherical tank models?

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

g y yconstraint Tangential

Constraint*Tangential Constraint* O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Hydrostaticpressure

Edge Symmetry constraint

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Hydrostaticpressure

constraint


Edge Symmetryconstraint


5-14

One-quarter Symmetry ModelAxisymmetric modelconstraint

* Tangential constraint used to allow comparison to Roarke closed form solution.

Training Manual

Chapter 5 - D. Postprocessing

Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Postprocessing is the final step in the finite element analysis process. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• It is imperative that you interpret your results relative to the assumptions made during model creation and solution. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• You may be required to make design decisions based on the results, so it is a good idea not only to review the results carefully, but also to check the validity of the solution. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• ANSYS has two postprocessors:– POST1, the General Postprocessor, to review a single set of results

over the entire model. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– POST26, the Time-History Postprocessor, to review results at selected points in the model over time. Mainly used for transient and nonlinear analyses. (Not discussed in this course.)


5-15

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What are the circumferential stress results in the spherical tank models? O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



5-16


Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What are the meridional stress results in the spherical tank models? O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



5-17


Training Manual


VerificationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• It is always a good idea to do a “sanity check” and make sure that the solution is acceptable. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• What you need to check depends on the type of problem you are solving, but here are some typical questions to ask: O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Do the reaction forces balance the applied loads?

• Where is the maximum stress located?If it i t i l it h i t l d t t th

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– If it is at a singularity, such as a point load or a re-entrant corner, the value is generally meaningless.

– Are the stress values beyond the elastic limit?– If so, the load magnitudes may be wrong, or you may need to do a Part 1


, g y g, y ynonlinear analysis.


5-18

Training Manual


…VerificationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• How do the ANSYS results compare with Roarke?

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Membrane Stress Distributions for Axisymmetric Model

140

160

180

Membrane Stress Distributions for Quarter Symmetry Model

140

160

180

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN80

100

120

140

y (in

ches

)

80

100

120

140

y (in

ches

)

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP0

20

40

60

000

000

000

000

000 0

000

000

000

000

000

Circumferential Stress (Roarke)Circumferential Stress (Axisymmetric)Meridional Stress (Roarke)Meridional Stress (Axisymmetric)

y0

20

40

60

000

000

000

000

000 0

000

000

000

000

000

Circumferential Stress (Roarke)Circumferential (quarter symmetry)Meridional Stress (Roarke)Meridional Stress (quarter symmetry)

y


-100 -80

-60

-40

-20 20 40 60 80 100

Stress (Psi)

-100 -80

-60

-40

-20 20 40 60 80 100

Stress (Psi)


5-19


Chapter 6

Creating the Solid Model

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – Creating the Solid Model

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The purpose of this chapter is to review some preliminary modeling considerations, discuss how to import one’s geometry i t ANSYS d fi ll i t d h t t ’ t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

into ANSYS, and finally introduce how to create one’s geometry using ANSYS native commands.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



6-2

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – Creating the Solid Model

A. What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Many modeling decisions must be made before building an analysis model: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– How much detail should be included?– Does symmetry apply?– Will the model contain stress singularities? O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-3

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – A. What to Model

…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Details

S ll d t il th t i t t t th l i h ld t b

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Small details that are unimportant to the analysis should not be included in the analysis model. You can suppress such features before sending a model to ANSYS from a CAD system. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• For some structures, however, "small" details such as fillets or holes can be locations of maximum stress and might be quite important, depending on your analysis objectives. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



6-4

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Symmetry

M t t t i i f d ll l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Many structures are symmetric in some form and allow only a representative portion or cross-section to be modeled.

• The main advantages of using a symmetric model are: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g g y– It is generally easier to create the model.– It allows you to make a finer, more detailed model and thereby obtain

better results than would have been possible with the full model. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-5

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To take advantage of symmetry, all of the following must be symmetric: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Geometry– Material properties– Loading conditions O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• There are different types of symmetry:– Axisymmetry– Rotational N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Planar or reflective– Repetitive or translational



6-6

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Axisymmetry

S t b t t l i h i li ht b lb t i ht

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Symmetry about a central axis, such as in light bulbs, straight pipes, cones, circular plates, and domes.

• Plane of symmetry is the cross-section anywhere around the ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y y ystructure. Thus you are using a single 2-D “slice” to represent 360° — a real savings in model size!

• Loading is also assumed to be NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Loading is also assumed to be axisymmetric in most cases. However, if it is not, and if the analysis is linear, the loads can be separated into h i t f i d d t


harmonic components for independent solutions that can be superimposed.


6-7

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Rotational symmetry

R t d t d b t t l i h i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Repeated segments arranged about a central axis, such as in turbine rotors.

• Only one segment of the structure needs to be modeled. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y g

• Loading is also assumed to be symmetric about the axis.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-8

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Planar or reflective symmetry

O h lf f th t t i i i f th th h lf Th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• One half of the structure is a mirror image of the other half. The mirror is the plane of symmetry.

• Loading may be symmetric or anti-symmetric about the plane of ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g y y y psymmetry.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPThis model illustrates

both reflective and Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

rotational symmetry


6-9

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Repetitive or translational symmetry

R t d t d l t i ht li h l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Repeated segments arranged along a straight line, such as a long pipe with evenly spaced cooling fins.

• Loading is also assumed to be “repeated” along the length of the ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g p g gmodel.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1This model illustrates both repetitive and reflective symmetry.


6-10

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In some cases, only a few minor details will disrupt a structure's symmetry. You may be able to ignore such details (or treat them

b i t i ) i d t i th b fit f i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

as being symmetric) in order to gain the benefits of using a smaller model. How much accuracy is lost as the result of such a compromise might be difficult to estimate. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-11

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Stress singularities

A t i l it i l ti i fi it l t d l h

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A stress singularity is a location in a finite element model where the stress value is unbounded (infinite). Examples:

– A point load, such as an applied force or moment– An isolated constraint point, where the reaction force behaves like a

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

An isolated constraint point, where the reaction force behaves like a point load

– A sharp re-entrant corner (with zero fillet radius)

A th h d it i fi d t

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• As the mesh density is refined ata stress singularity, the stress valueincreases and never converges.

P σ = P/AAs A ⇒ 0, σ ⇒ ∞



6-12

Training Manual


…What to model?IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Real structures do not contain stress singularities. They are a fiction created by the simplifying assumptions of the model. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• So how do you deal with stress singularities?– If they are located far away from the region of interest, you can simply

ignore them by deactivating the affected zone while reviewing results. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g y g g– If they are located in the region of interest, you will need to take

corrective action, such as:• adding a fillet at re-entrant corners and rerunning the analysis. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• replacing a point force with an equivalent pressure load.• “spreading out” displacement constraints over a set of nodes.



6-13

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – B. Importing Geometry

B. IGES ImportsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Importing an IGES file– Utility Menu > File > Import > IGES… O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– the two methods, No Defeaturing and Defeaturing– the Merge, Solid, and Small options

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



6-14

Training Manual


Connection ProductsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• IGES importing works quite well, but because of the dual translation process — CAD ⌫ IGES ⌫ ANSYS — there are many

h 100% t l ti i t hi d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

cases when a 100% translation is not achieved.

• ANSYS Connection products help overcome this problem by directly reading the “native” part files produced by the CAD O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y g p p ypackage:

– Connection for Pro/ENGINEER (“Pro/E” for short)– Connection for Unigraphics (“UG” for short) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Connection for SAT– Connection for Parasolid– Connection for CATIA Part 1


• To use a connection product, you need to purchase the appropriate license.


6-15

Training Manual


…Connection ProductsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Connection for SAT– Reads .sat file produced by CAD packages that use the ACIS modeler. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Does not require ACIS software.– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT...– Or ~satin O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Option to read only selected geometry types

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Defeaturing option available

No Defeaturing is default


6-16

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Connection for Parasolid– Reads .x_t or .xmt_txt file produced by CAD packages that use the

P lid d l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Parasolid modeler.– Does not require Parasolid software.– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA...– Or ~parain

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Or parain

Option to read only NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPDefeaturing option available

N D f t i i d f lt

p yselected geometry types


No Defeaturing is default

Option to scale geometry


6-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The importing procedure from other CAD systems is similar. See the Connection Users Guide for detailed instructions for each CAD system. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Supported CAD systems on Windows:

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Supported CAD systems on UNIX:



6-18

Training Manual


WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W6A. Importing Geometry – IGES Import O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W6B. Importing Geometry – SAT Part ImportW6C. Importing Geometry – SAT Assembly ImportW6D. Importing Geometry – Parasolid Part ImportW6E Importing Geometry Parasolid Assembly Import

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

W6E. Importing Geometry – Parasolid Assembly Import

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-19

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – C. ANSYS Native Commands

C. OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Importing geometry is convenient, but sometimes you may need to create it in ANSYS. Some possible reasons: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– You may need to build a parametric model — one defined in terms of variables for later use in design optimization or sensitivity studies.

– The geometry may not be available in a format ANSYS can read.– The Connection product you need may not be available on your

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

The Connection product you need may not be available on your computer platform.

– You may need to modify or add geometry to an imported part or assembly. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• ANSYS has an extensive set of geometry creation tools, which we will introduce next.



6-20

Training Manual


DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Solid Modeling can be defined as the process of creating solid models. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Definitions:– A solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines,

and keypoints.

Volumes

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

yp– Volumes are bounded by areas, areas by lines, and

lines by keypoints.– Hierarchy of entities from low to high:

k i t li l

Areas

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

keypoints < lines < areas < volumes – You cannot delete an entity if a higher-order entity

is attached to it.

Lines &Keypoints


• Also, a model with just areas and below, such as a shell or 2-D plane model, is still considered a solid model in ANSYS terminology.

Keypoints

Lines

Areas

Volumes


6-21

Keypoints

Training Manual


…DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are two approaches to creating a solid model:– Top-down O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Bottom-up

• Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or areas), which are then combined in some fashion to create the final O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

which are then combined in some fashion to create the final shape.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1add


6-22

Training Manual


…DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Bottom-up modeling starts with keypoints, from which you “build up” lines, areas, etc. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• You may choose whichever approach best suits the shape of the model, and also freely combine both methods.


• The top-down and bottom-up modeling approaches are not discussed here, but are described in detail in the Appendix.


6-23

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation

D. Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The “WP” in the prompts and in the picker stands for Working Plane — a movable, 2-D reference plane used to locate and orient

i iti

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

primitives.– By default, the WP origin coincides with the global origin, but you can

move it and/or rotate it to any desired position.– By displaying a grid, you can use the WP as a “drawing tablet.” O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y p y g g , y g– WP is infinite despite the grid settings.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPWY

WXWY Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

X2

X1 Y2

Y1 WP (X Y)


6-24

WXY1 WP (X,Y)

Training Manual


…Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• All working plane controls are in Utility Menu > WorkPlane.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The WP Settings menu controls the following:

– WP display - triad only (default), grid only, or

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

WP display triad only (default), grid only, or both.

– Snap - allows you to pick locations on the WP easily by “snapping” the cursor to the nearest grid point N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

grid point.– Grid spacing - the distance between grid

lines.– Grid size - how much of the (infinite) working

l i di l d


plane is displayed.


6-25

Training Manual


…Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• You can move the working plane to any desired position using th Off t d Ali

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

the Offset and Align menus.– Offset WP by Increments…

• Use the push buttons (with increment set by slider).

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

increment set by slider).• Or type in the desired

increments.• Or use dynamic mode N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

(similar to pan-zoom-rotate).



6-26

Training Manual


…Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Offset WP to >This simply “translates” the WP, maintaining its current orientation to

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

maintaining its current orientation, to the desired destination, which can be:

• Existing keypoint(s). Picking multiple keypoints moves WP to O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

their average location.• Existing node(s).• Coordinate location(s).

Gl b l i i

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Global origin.• Origin of the active coordinate

system (discussed later). Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


6-27

Training Manual


…Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Align WP with >This reorients the WP.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• For example, Align WP with Keypointsprompts you to pick 3 keypoints -one at the origin, one to define the X-axis, and one to define the X-Y O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

plane.• To return the WP to its default

position (at global origin, on global X-Y plane), click on Align WP with > N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

p ), gGlobal Cartesian.



6-28

Training Manual


…Working PlaneIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Clear the database

Display WP and create a few keypoints by picking Note the coordinates

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Display WP and create a few keypoints by picking. Note the coordinates displayed in the picker.

– Turn on the grid, change spacing, and activate snap.– Create more keypoints. Note how the cursor snaps to grid points.

Define 2 rectangles one by picking corners and one by dimensions

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Define 2 rectangles — one by picking corners and one by dimensions.– Now offset WP to average of a few keypoints, then rotate in-plane by 30º.– Define 2 more rectangles by picking and by dimensions. Note the change in

rectangle orientation.Align WP with global origin then define some 3 D primitives Use picking as well

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Align WP with global origin, then define some 3-D primitives. Use picking as well as “By dimensions.”



6-29

Training Manual

Chapter 6 – E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems

Active Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Active Coordinate System

D f lt t l b l C t i

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Defaults to global Cartesian.

• Use CSYS command (or Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to) to O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g )change it to

– global Cartesian [csys,0]– global cylindrical [csys,1] N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– global spherical [csys,2]– working plane [csys,4]– or a user-defined local coordinate

system [csys, n] Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

system [csys, n]

Each of these systems is explained next.


6-30

Training Manual


Global Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Global Coordinate System

Th l b l f t f th d l

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The global reference system for the model.

• May be Cartesian (system 0), cylindrical (1), or spherical (2).– For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as (10,90,0) in global Cylindrical.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-31

Training Manual


Local Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Local Coordinate System

A d fi d t t d i d l ti ith ID

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• A user-defined system at a desired location, with ID number 11 or greater. The location may be:

– At WP origin [CSWP]– At specified coordinates [LOCAL]

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

At specified coordinates [LOCAL]– At existing keypoints [CSKP] or nodes [CS]

• May be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• May be rotated about X, Y, Z axes.


YY11

X12Y12


6-32

XX11

Training Manual


Working Plane Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Working Plane Coordinate System

Att h d t th ki l

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Attached to the working plane.

• Used mainly to locate and orient solid model primitives. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• You can also use the working plane to define keypoints by picking.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



6-33

Training Manual


CSYSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• You can define any number of coordinate systems, but only one may be active at any given time

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

may be active at any given time.

• Several geometry items are affected by the coordinate system [CSYS] that is active at the time they are defined:

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

is active at the time they are defined:– Keypoint and node locations– Line curvature– Area curvature

G ti d “filli ” f k i t

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Generation and “filling” of keypoints and nodes

– Etc.

• The graphics window title shows the


• The graphics window title shows the active system.


6-34

Areas created between keypoints at (1,0,0), (0,1,0), & (0,0,1)

Training Manual


Active Coordinate System DemoIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Clear the database

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Create 5 keypoints at (1,2), (3,2), (4,0), (1,1.5), (2.5,0)– Switch to CSYS,1 and create a line “in active CS” between KP4 & KP5– Switch back to CSYS,0 and create an area “through KP’s.” Notice that

the remaining lines were automatically generated lines all of them

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

the remaining lines were automatically generated lines, all of them straight.

– Define two circles:• 0.3R, centered at (2.25,1.5) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• 0.35R, centered at (3.0,0.6)– Subtract the two circles from base area. (We have used a combination

of bottom-up and top-down modeling.)Save as r db


– Save as r.db


6-35

Chapter 7

Create Finite Element Model

Training Manual

Chapter 7 – Creating the Finite Element Model

A. OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The purpose of this chapter is to discuss the meshing element attributes, various means to create a mesh in ANSYS, and finally h t i t ’ fi it l t d l di tl i t ANSYS

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

how to import one’s finite element model directly into ANSYS. Recall, ANSYS does not use the solid model in the solution of the model, rather it needs to use finite elements. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-2

Training Manual


…OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Meshing is the process used to “fill” the solid model with nodes and elements, i.e, to create the FEA model. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Remember, you need nodes and elements for the finite element solution, not just the solid model. The solid model does NOT participate in the finite element solution.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

meshing

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Solid model FEA model

meshing


7-3

Training Manual


B. Element AttributesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are three steps to meshing:– Define element attributes O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Specify mesh controls– Generate the mesh

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Element attributes are characteristics of the finite element model that you must establish prior to meshing. They can include:

– Element types NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Real constants– Material properties– Section properties Part 1



7-4

Training Manual


…Element AttributesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Element Type

Th l t t i i t t h i th t d t i th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The element type is an important choice that determines the following element characteristics:

– Degree of Freedom (DOF) set. A thermal element type, for example, has one dof: TEMP, whereas a structural element type may have up to O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

, yp y psix dof: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ.

– Element shape -- brick, tetrahedron, quadrilateral, triangle, etc.– Dimensionality -- 2-D (X-Y plane only), or 3-D.

A d di l t h li d ti

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Assumed displacement shape -- linear vs. quadratic.

• ANSYS has a “library” of over 170 element types from which you can choose. Details on how to choose the “correct” element type Part 1


ypwill be presented later. For now, let’s see how to define an element type.


7-5

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Element category

ANSYS ff diff t t i f l t S f th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• ANSYS offers many different categories of elements. Some of the commonly used ones are:

– Line elements– Shells

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Shells– 2-D solids– 3-D solids

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-6

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Line elements:– Beam elements are used to model bolts, tubular members, C-sections,

l i l l d b h l b d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

angle irons, or any long, slender members where only membrane and bending stresses are needed.

– Link elements are used to model springs, bolts, preloaded bolts, and truss members. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Spring (combination) elements are used to model springs, bolts, or long slender parts, or to replace complex parts by an equivalent stiffness.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-7

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Shell elements:– Used to model thin panels or curved surfaces. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– The definition of “thin” depends on the application, but as a general guideline, the major dimensions of the shell structure (panel) should be at least 10 times its thickness.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-8

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• 2-D Solid elements:– Used to model a cross-section of solid objects. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Must be modeled in the global Cartesian X-Y plane.– All loads are in the X-Y plane, and the response (displacements) are

also in the X-Y plane.– Element behavior may be one of the following:

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Element behavior may be one of the following:• plane stress• plane strain• generalized plain strain N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

generalized plain strain• axisymmetric• axisymmetric harmonic

Y


Y

X Z


7-9

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Plane stress assumes zero stress in the Z direction. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Valid for components in which the Z dimension is smaller than the X and Y dimensions.

– Z-strain is non-zero.

Y

XZ

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Optional thickness (Z direction) allowed.

– Used for structures such as flat plates subjected to in-plane loading or thin

X Z

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

subjected to in-plane loading, or thin disks under pressure or centrifugal loading.



7-10

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Plane strain assumes zero strain in the Z direction. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Valid for components in which the Z dimension is much larger than the X and Y dimensions.

– Z-stress is non-zero.– Used for long constant cross-section structures Z

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Used for long, constant cross-section structures such as structural beams.

Y X

Z

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-11

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Generalized Plane Strain assumes a finite deformation domain length in the Z direction, as opposed to the infinite value assumed O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

for standard plane strain. – Gives more practical results for deformation problems where the Z-

direction dimension is not long enough.– Gives users a more efficient way to simulate certain 3-D deformations

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Gives users a more efficient way to simulate certain 3-D deformations using 2-D element options.

– Option is a feature developed for PLANE182 and PLANE183. – The deformation domain or structure N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

is formed by extruding a plane area along a curve with a constant curvature.



7-12

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Axisymmetry assumes that the 3-D model and its loading can be generated by revolving a 2-D

ti 360° b t th Y i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

section 360° about the Y axis.– Axis of symmetry must coincide with the global Y

axis.– Negative X coordinates are not permitted. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g p– Y direction is axial, X direction is radial, and Z

direction is circumferential (hoop) direction.– Hoop displacement is zero; hoop strains and

stresses are usually very significant

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

stresses are usually very significant.– Used for pressure vessels, straight pipes, shafts,

etc.



7-13

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Axisymmetric harmonic is a special case of axisymmetry where the loads can be non-axisymmetric. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– The non-axisymmetric loading is decomposed into Fourier series components, applied and solved separately, and then combined later. No approximation is introduced by this simplification!

– Used for non-axisymmetric loads such as torque on a shaft. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y q

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-14

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• 3-D Solid elements:– Used for structures which, because of geometry, materials, loading, or

d t il f i d lt t b d l d ith i l l t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

detail of required results, cannot be modeled with simpler elements. – Also used when the model geometry is transferred from a 3-D CAD

system, and a large amount of time and effort is required to convert it to a 2-D or shell form. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-15

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Element Order

El t d f t th l i l d f th l t’

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Element order refers to the polynomial order of the element’s shape functions.

• What is a shape function? ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p– It is a mathematical function that gives the “shape” of the results

within the element. Since FEA solves for DOF values only at nodes, we need the shape function to map the nodal DOF values to points within the element N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

within the element.– The shape function represents assumed behavior for a given element.– How well each assumed element shape function matches the true

behavior directly affects the accuracy of the solution, as shown on the t lid


next slide.


7-16

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Quadratic distribution of

Linear approximation (Poor Results) O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Quadratic distribution of DOF values

Actual quadratic curve O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPQuadratic approximation

(Best Results)

Linear approximation with multiple elements

(Better Results)


(Best Results)(Better Results)


7-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• When you choose an element type, you are implicitly choosing and accepting the element shape function assumed for that

l t t Th f h k th h f ti i f ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

element type. Therefore, check the shape function information before you choose an element type.

• Typically, a linear element has only corner nodes, whereas a ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

yp y, y ,quadratic element also has midside nodes.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-18

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Linear elements

• Can support only a linear variation of

Quadratic elements

• Can support a quadratic variation of

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

pp ydisplacement and therefore (mostly) only a constant state of stress within a single element.

Highly sensitive to element distortion

pp qdisplacement and therefore a linear variation of stress within a single element.

Can represent curved edges and

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Highly sensitive to element distortion.

• Acceptable if you are only interested in nominal stress results.

• Can represent curved edges and surfaces more accurately than linear elements. Not as sensitive to element distortion.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Need to use a large number of elements to resolve high stress gradients.

• Recommended if you are interested in highly accurate stresses.

• Give better results than linear elements in many cases with fewer


elements, in many cases with fewer number of elements and total DOF.


7-19

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Notes:– For shell models, the difference between linear and quadratic

l t i t d ti f lid d l Li h ll

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

elements is not as dramatic as for solid models. Linear shells are therefore usually preferred.

– Besides linear and quadratic elements, a third kind is available, known as p-elements. P-elements can support anywhere from a quadratic to O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

an 8th-order variation of displacement within a single element and include automatic solution convergence controls.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-20

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Mesh Density

Th f d t l i f FEA i th t th b f

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The fundamental premise of FEA is that as the number of elements (mesh density) is increased, the solution gets closer and closer to the true solution. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• However, solution time and computer resources required also increase dramatically as you increase the number of elements.

• The objectives of the analysis usually decide which way the slider

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The objectives of the analysis usually decide which way the slider bar below should be moved.



7-21

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Stress Analyses:– If you are interested in highly accurate stresses: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• A fine mesh will be needed, omitting no geometric details at any location in the structure where such accuracy is needed.

• Stress convergence should be demonstrated.Any simplification anywhere in the model might introduce

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Any simplification anywhere in the model might introduce significant error.

– If you are interested in deflections or nominal stresses:• A relatively coarse mesh is sufficient. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

y• Small geometry details may be omitted.

• Thermal Analyses: Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– Small details can usually be omitted, but since many thermal analyses are followed by a stress analysis, stress considerations generally dictate the detail of the model.

– Mesh density is usually determined by expected thermal gradients. A


7-22

y y y gfine mesh is required for high thermal gradients, whereas a coarse mesh may be sufficient for low gradients.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To define an element type:– Main Menu > Preprocessor >

El t T > Add/Edit/D l t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete• [Add] to add new element type• Choose the desired type

(such as SOLID92) and press

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

(such as SOLID92) and press OK

• [Options] to specify additional element options

O th ET d

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Or use the ET command:• et,1,solid92



7-23

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Notes:– Setting preferences to the desired discipline (Main Menu > Preferences)

ill h l th l t t lid f th t di i li

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

will show only the element types valid for that discipline.– You should define the element type early in the preprocessing phase

because many of the menu choices in the GUI are filtered out based on the current DOF set. For example, if you choose a structural O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

element type, thermal load choices will not be not shown at all.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-24

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Real Constants and Section Properties:

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Used for geometric properties that cannot be completely defined by the element’s geometry. For example:

– A beam element is defined by a line joining two nodes. This defines only the length of the beam To specify the beam’s cross-sectional

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

only the length of the beam. To specify the beam s cross-sectional properties, such as the area, moment of inertia or dimensions, you need to use real constants or section properties.

– A shell element is defined by a quadrilateral or triangular area. This defines only the surface area of the shell To specify the shell

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

defines only the surface area of the shell. To specify the shell thickness or layers, you need to use real constants or section properties.

– Most 3-D solid elements do not require a real constant since the l t t i f ll d fi d b it d


element geometry is fully defined by its nodes.


7-25

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To define real constants:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Real

C t t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Constants• [Add] to add a new real constant

set.• If multiple element types have

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

If multiple element types have been defined, choose the element type for which you are specifying real constants.Then enter the real constant

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Then enter the real constant values.

– Or use the R family of commands.


• Different element types require different real constants. Check the Elements Manual, available on-line, for details


7-26

for details.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To define section properties:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Sections

Abilit t I t S ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Ability to Import Sections• Beam, Shell and Pretension sections can

be created.• Or use the SECxxx family of commands

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Or use the SECxxx family of commands.

• Different element types require different section properties. See the Elements M l f d t il

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Manual for details.



7-27

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Material Properties

E l i i t i l t i t Y ’

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Every analysis requires some material property input: Young’s modulus EX for structural elements, thermal conductivity KXX for thermal elements, etc. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Refer to Chapter 8 for details on the two ways to define material properties.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-28

Training Manual


C. Multiple Element AttributesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Most FEA models have multiple attributes. For example, the silo shown here has two element types, three real constant sets, and two materials. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

TYPE 1 = shell

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

MAT 1 = concreteMAT 2 = steel

TYPE 1 shellTYPE 2 = beam

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

REAL 1 = 3/8” thicknessREAL 2 = beam propertiesREAL 3 = 1/8” thickness Part 1



7-29

Training Manual


…Multiple Element AttributesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Whenever you have multiple TYPEs, REALs, MATs and SECNUMs, you need to make sure that each element is assigned the proper

tt ib t Th th t d thi

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

attributes. There are three ways to do this:– Assign attributes to the solid model entities before meshing– Activate a “global” setting of TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM before

meshing ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g– Modify element attributes after meshing

• If no assignments are made, ANSYS uses default settings of TYPE 1 REAL 1 MAT 1 d SECNUM 1 f ll l t i th

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

TYPE=1, REAL=1, MAT=1 and SECNUM=1 for all elements in the model. Note, the current active setting dictates mesh operation.

• Good practice is to use the same number for TYPE, REAL, MAT Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

p , ,and SECNUM for a given part.


7-30

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Assigning Attributes to the Solid Model

1 Define all necessary element types materials and

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Define all necessary element types, materials, and real constant sets.

2. Then use the “Element Attributes” section of the MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool):

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool):– Choose entity type and press the SET button.– Pick the entities to which you want to assign

attributes.Set the appropriate attributes in the subsequent N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Set the appropriate attributes in the subsequent dialog box.

Or select the desired entities and use the VATT, AATT, LATT, or KATT command. Part 1


AATT, LATT, or KATT command.

3. When you mesh an entity, its attributes are automatically transferred to the elements.


7-31

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Using Global Attribute Settings

1 Define all necessary element types

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Define all necessary element types, materials, real constant sets and section numbers

2 Then use the “Element Attributes” section

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

2. Then use the Element Attributes section of the MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool):

– Choose Global and press the SET button.Activate the desired combination of attributes

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Activate the desired combination of attributes in the “Meshing Attributes” dialog box. We refer to these as the active TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM settings. Part 1


Or use the TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUMcommands.

3. Mesh only those entities to which the above


7-32

ysettings apply.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Modifying Element Attributes

1 Define all necessary element types materials and real constant

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Define all necessary element types, materials, and real constant sets.

2. Activate the desired combination of TYPE, REAL, MAT, and SECNUM settings

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

SECNUM settings:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesh Attributes > Default Attribs– Or use the TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM commands

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

3. Modify the attributes of only those elements to which the above settings apply:

– Issue EMODIF,PICK or choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Move/Modify > Elements > Modify Attrib Part 1


y y– Then pick the desired elements

4. In the subsequent dialog box,set attributes to “All to current.”


7-33

set attributes to All to current.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Some points to keep in mind:

• You can verify element attributes by activating

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• You can verify element attributes by activating attribute numbering:

– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering– Or /PNUM,attr,ON, where attr may be TYPE,

REAL MAT or SECNUM

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

REAL, MAT or SECNUM

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Element attributes assigned directly to solid model entities will override the default attribute pointers. Part 1


• By assigning attributes to solid model entities, you can avoid having to reset attributes in the middle of meshing operations. This is advantageous because ANSYS meshing algorithms are most efficient when meshing all entities at once.


7-34

g

• Clearing a solid model entity of its mesh will not delete attribute assignments.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume ribgeom.db O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– List element types, real constants, and materials. One of each has been defined.

– Bring up MeshTool, choose area attributes, and press Set– Pick the single area show the Area Attributes dialog box and press

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Pick the single area, show the Area Attributes dialog box, and press OK. (There is only one set of attributes, but this illustrates the general procedure.)

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-35

Training Manual


D. WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W7A. Silo O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-36

Training Manual


E. Controlling Mesh DensityIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS provides many tools to control mesh density, both on a global and local level:

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Global controls• SmartSizing• Global element sizing

D f lt i i

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Default sizing– Local controls

• Keypoint sizing• Line sizing N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Line sizing• Area sizing



7-37

Training Manual


…Controlling Mesh DensityIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

SmartSizing

D t i l t i b i i di i i ll li

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Determines element sizes by assigning divisions on all lines, taking into account curvature of the line, its proximity to holes and other features, and element order. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• SmartSizing is off by default, but is recommended for free meshing. It does not affect mapped meshing. (Free meshing vs. mapped meshing will be discussed later.) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-38

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To use SmartSizing:– Bring up the MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor >

M hi M hT l) t S tSi i d t th

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Meshing > MeshTool), turn on SmartSizing, and set the desired size level.

• Or use SMRT,level• Size level ranges from 1 (very fine) to 10 (very

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Size level ranges from 1 (very fine) to 10 (very coarse). Defaults to 6.

– Then mesh all volumes (or all areas) at once, rather than one-by-one. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-39

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Examples of different SmartSize levels are shown here for a tetrahedron mesh

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

tetrahedron mesh.

• Advanced SmartSize controls, such as mesh expansion and transition factors are available on the SMRT

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

factors, are available on the SMRTcommand or:

Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > SmartSize > Adv Opts N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• You can turn off SmartSizing using the MeshTool or by issuing smrt,off.



7-40

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Global Element Sizing

• Allows you to specify a maximum element edge length

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Allows you to specify a maximum element edge length for the entire model (or number of divisions per line):

– ESIZE,SIZE– or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then

select “Size Controls”, “Global” ,and [Set] ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Global > Size

• Can be used by itself or in conjunction with SmartSizing N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

SmartSizing.– Using ESIZE by itself (SmartSizing off) will

result in a uniform element size throughout the volume (or area) being meshed.

– With SmartSizing on, ESIZE acts as a “guide,”


With SmartSizing on, ESIZE acts as a guide, but the specified size may be overridden to accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.


7-41

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Default Sizing

If d ’t if t l ANSYS d f lt i i hi h

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• If you don’t specify any controls, ANSYS uses default sizing, which assigns minimum and maximum line divisions, aspect ratio, etc. based on element order. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Meant for mapped meshing, but is also used for free meshing if SmartSizing is off.

• You can adjust default size specifications using DESIZE or

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• You can adjust default size specifications using DESIZE or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Global > Other



7-42

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Keypoint Sizing

C t l l t i t k i t

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Controls element size at keypoints:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then

select “Size Controls, “Keypt”, and [Set]– or KESIZE command O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Keypoints

Different keypoints can have different KESIZEs giving NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Different keypoints can have different KESIZEs, giving you more control over the mesh.

• Useful for stress concentration regions. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing to

accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.


7-43

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Line Sizing

• Controls element size at lines:

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then select “Size Controls”, “Lines”, and [Set]

– or LESIZE command– or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p g> ManualSize> Lines

Different lines can have different LESIZEs.

• Size specifications may be “hard” or “soft ”

Yes for “soft”No for “hard”

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Size specifications may be hard or soft.– “Hard” sizes are always honored by the mesher, even if

SmartSizing is on. They take precedence over all other size controls.

– “Soft” sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

• You can also specify a spacing ratio — ratio of last division to first. Used to bias the divisions towards one end or towards the middle.


7-44

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Area Sizing

C t l l t i i th i t i f

g yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Controls element size in the interior of areas:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then

select “Size Controls”, “Areas”, and [Set]– or AESIZE command O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Areas

Different areas can have different AESIZEs NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Different areas can have different AESIZEs.

• Bounding lines will use the specified size only if they have no LESIZE or KESIZE specified and if no Part 1


adjacent area has a smaller size.

• Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing to accommodate line curvature or proximity to features


7-45

accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.

Training Manual


F. Mesh Order ControlIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• By default, ANSYS will mesh areas or volumes in ascending entity number. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The AORDER field on the MOPT command instructs ANSYS to mesh a group of areas or volumes in order of ascending size.

Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesher Opts or

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesher Opts , or– MOPT,AORDER,ON (default is OFF)

• In cases where SmartSizing does not mesh as fine as needed, NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

gthe MOPT, AORDER,on command generates finer meshes in critical areas for volume meshes

• This option is not available when SmartSizing is on


• This option is not available when SmartSizing is on.


7-46

Training Manual


G. Generating the MeshIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Generating the mesh is the final step in meshing.

• First save the database

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• First save the database.

• Then press [Mesh] in the MeshTool.– This brings up a picker. Press [Pick All] in the picker O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g p p [ ] pto indicate all entities.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-47

Training Manual


…Generating the MeshIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume ribgeom.db

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Mesh with SMRT,6. (Not a very good mesh)– Re-mesh with SMRT,3 (good mesh)– Set ESIZE to 0.2 and re-mesh. The mesh becomes coarse even though

SMRT is set to 3 because the smart-mesher takes ESIZE into account

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

SMRT is set to 3, because the smart mesher takes ESIZE into account. Also, note that the element sizes are not uniform (because SMRT is on).

– Turn off SMRT and re-mesh. Element sizes are now more uniform (but not ideal) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

not ideal).– Re-mesh with ESIZE set to 0.1.

G f S S


• Good meshes generated for this geometry with SMRT,3 or ESIZE,0.1.


7-48

Training Manual


H. Changing a MeshIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• If a mesh is not acceptable, you can always re-mesh the model by following these steps:

g gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

1. Clear the mesh.• The clear operation is the opposite of mesh: it

removes nodes and elements.• Use the [Clear] button on the MeshTool or use

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Use the [Clear] button on the MeshTool, or use VCLEAR, ACLEAR, etc.

(If you are using the MeshTool, you may skip this step since the program will prompt you whether to clear or not hen o e ec te step 3 )

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

clear or not when you execute step 3.)2. Specify new or different mesh controls.3. Mesh again.



7-49

Training Manual


…Changing a MeshIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Another meshing option is to refine the mesh in specific regions.

Available for all area elements and only

g gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Available for all area elements and only tetrahedral volume elements.

– Easiest way is to use the MeshTool:• First save the database.

Th h h t t

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Then choose how you want to specify the region of refinement — at nodes, elements, keypoints, lines, or areas — and press the Refine button.

• Pick the entities at which you want NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Pick the entities at which you want the mesh to be refined. (Not required if you choose “All Elems.”)

• Finally, choose the level of refinement. Level 1 (minimal Part 1


(refinement) is a good starting point.


7-50

Training Manual


…Changing a MeshIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Continuing the last demo… (ribgeom has been meshed with ESIZE =

0 2)

g gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

0.2)– Choose refinement at Lines and press Refine– Pick the top line, then choose the default “minimal refinement” O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-51

Training Manual


I. Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are two main meshing methods: free and mapped.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Free Mesh– Has no element shape restrictions.– The mesh does not follow any pattern.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

The mesh does not follow any pattern.– Suitable for complex shaped areas and volumes.

• Mapped Mesh NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Restricts element shapes to quadrilaterals for areas and hexahedra (bricks) for volumes.

– Typically has a regular pattern with obvious rows of elements. Part 1


– Suitable only for “regular” areas and volumes such as rectangles and bricks.


7-52

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Free Mesh

+ Easy to create; no need to divide

Mapped Mesh

+ Generally contains a lower

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

+ Easy to create; no need to divide complex shapes into regular shapes.

– Volume meshes can contain only

+ Generally contains a lower number of elements.

+ Lower-order elements may be acceptable so the number of

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Volume meshes can contain only tetrahedra, resulting in a large number of elements.

– Only higher-order (10-node)

acceptable, so the number of DOF is lower.

– Areas and volumes must be “regular” in shape and mesh N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Only higher-order (10-node) tetrahedral elements are acceptable, so the number of DOF can be very high.

regular in shape, and mesh divisions must meet certain criteria.

– Very difficult to achieve


Very difficult to achieve, especially for complex shaped volumes.


7-53

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Creating a Free Mesh

• Free meshing is the default setting for both area

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Free meshing is the default setting for both area and volume meshes.

• Create a free mesh is easy:Bring up the MeshTool and verify that free meshing is

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Bring up the MeshTool and verify that free meshing is set.

– SmartSizing is generally recommended for free meshing, so activate it and specify a size level. Save the database. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Then initiate the mesh by pressing the Mesh button.• Press [Pick All] in the picker to choose all entities

(recommended).– Or use the commands VMESH,ALL or AMESH,ALL.


Or use the commands VMESH,ALL or AMESH,ALL.


7-54

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Creating a Mapped Mesh

Thi i t f hi b th d

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• This is not as easy as free meshing because the areas and volumes have to meet certain requirements:

– Area must contain either 3 or 4 lines (triangle or quadrilateral).– Volume must contain either 4, 5, or 6 areas (tetrahedron, triangular

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Volume must contain either 4, 5, or 6 areas (tetrahedron, triangular prism, or hexahedron).

– Element divisions on opposite sides must match.• For triangular areas or tetrahedral volumes, the number of element

di i i t b

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

divisions must be even.



7-55

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• For quadrilateral areas or hexahedral volumes, unequal divisions are allowed, as shown in these examples, but the number of divisions must satisfy a formula (shown on the next page)

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

divisions must satisfy a formula (shown on the next page).

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-56

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-57

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Thus mapped meshing involves a three-step procedure:– Ensure “regular” shapes, i.e, areas with 3 or 4 sides, or volumes with

4 5 6 id

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

4, 5, or 6 sides.– Specify size and shape controls– Generate the mesh O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-58

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Ensure regular shapes

I t th d l t i h th t th h

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• In most cases, the model geometry is such that the areas have more than 4 sides, and volumes have more than 6 sides. To convert these to regular shapes, you may need to do one or both of these operations: O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p– Slice the areas (or volumes) into smaller, simpler shapes.– Concatenate two or more lines (or areas) to reduce the total number of

sides. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-59

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Slicing can be accomplished with the Boolean divide operation.– Remember that you can use the working plane, an area, or a line as

th li i t l

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

the slicing tool.– Sometimes, it may be easier to create a new line or a new area than to

move and orient the working plane in the correct direction.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-60

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Concatenation creates a new line (for meshing purposes) that is a combination of two or more lines, thereby reducing the number of li ki th

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

lines making up the area.– Use the LCCAT command or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing >

Concatenate > Lines, then pick the lines to be concatenated.– For area concatenation, use ACCAT command or Main Menu > O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

,Preprocessor > Meshing > Concatenate > Areas

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Concatenatingthese two lines Part 1


makes this a4-sided area


7-61

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• You can also imply a concatenation by simply identifying the three or four corners of the area. In this case ANSYS internally generates the concatenation

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

case, ANSYS internally generates the concatenation.– To do this, choose Quad shape and Map mesh in the

MeshTool.– Then change 3/4 sided to Pick corners.

Press the Mesh button pick the area and then pick the 3 or

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Press the Mesh button, pick the area, and then pick the 3 or 4 corners that form the regular shape.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-62

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Notes on concatenation:– It is purely a meshing operation and therefore should be the last step before

meshing after all solid modeling operations This is because the output entity

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

meshing, after all solid modeling operations. This is because the output entity obtained from a concatenation cannot be used in any subsequent solid modeling operation.

– You can "undo" a concatenation by deleting the line or area it produced.– Concatenating areas (for mapped volume meshing) is generally much more

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Co cate at g a eas ( o apped o u e es g) s ge e a y uc o ecomplicated because you may also need to concatenate some lines. Lines are automatically concatenated only when two adjacent, 4-sided areas are concatenated.

– Consider the add (Boolean) operation if the lines or areas meet at a tangent. NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-63

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Specify size and shape controls

• This is the second step of the three-step mapped

g

Meshing Areas:

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• This is the second step of the three-step mapped meshing procedure.

• Choosing the shape is simple. In the MeshTool, choose Quad for area meshing and Hex for volume meshing

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Quad for area meshing, and Hex for volume meshing, then click on Map.

• Commonly used size controls and the order in which they are applied: Meshing Volumes: N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

they are applied:– Line sizing [LESIZE] is always honored.– Global element size , if specified, will be applied to “unsized”

lines.Default element sizing [DESIZE] will be applied to unsized

Meshing Volumes:


– Default element sizing [DESIZE] will be applied to unsized lines only if ESIZE is not specified.

– (SmartSizing is not valid.)


7-64

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• If you specify line divisions, remember that:– divisions on opposite sides must match, but you only need to specify

id Th h t ti ll t f di i i t th

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

one side. The map mesher automatically transfers divisions to the opposite side.

– if you have concatenated lines, divisions can only be applied to the original (input) lines, not the composite line. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N6 divisions specified on each original line N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

each original line.

12 divisions will be automatically applied to this line (opposite to Part 1


composite line).

How many divisions are used for the other two lines? (Upcoming demo


7-65

lines? (Upcoming demo will answer it.)

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Generate the mapped mesh

O h d l h d i d th

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Once you have ensured regular shapes and assigned the appropriate divisions, generating the mesh is easy. Just press the Mesh button in the MeshTool, then press [Pick All] in the picker or choose the desired entities. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-66

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Question: How would you slice this model for

d hi ?

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

mapped meshing?

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


• Answer: It may not be worth the


7-67

effort!

Training Manual


…Mapped MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume ribfull.db

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Bring up MeshTool and apply 6 divisions to top and right lines– Map-mesh the area using “Pick corners.” Notice that the left and

bottom lines get only two divisions each (from DESIZE).– Now specify ESIZE 4 (4 divisions per line) and re-mesh

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Now specify ESIZE,,4 (4 divisions per line) and re mesh– Finally, clear line divisions, specify ESIZE,0.1 (size), and re-mesh

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-68

Training Manual


J. Hex-to-Tet MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• For volume meshing, we have only seen two options so far:

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Free meshing, which creates an all-tet mesh. This is easy to achieve but may not be desirable in some cases because of the large number of elements and total DOF created. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Mapped meshing, which creates an all-hex mesh. This is desirable but usually very difficult to achieve.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Hex-to-tet meshing provides a third option that is the “best of both worlds.” It allows you to have a combination of hex and tet meshes without compromising the integrity of the mesh


without compromising the integrity of the mesh.


7-69

Training Manual


…Hex-to-Tet MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• This option works by creating pyramid-shaped elements in the transition region between hex and tet regions.

Requires the hex mesh to be available (or at least a quad mesh at the shared

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Requires the hex mesh to be available (or at least a quad mesh at the shared area).

– The mesher first creates all tets, then combines and rearranges the tet elements in the transition region to form pyramids.

– Available only for element types that support both pyramid and tet shapes e g:

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Available only for element types that support both pyramid and tet shapes, e.g:• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89• Thermal SOLID90• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP– Results are good even in the transition Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

SOLID95

gregion. Element faces are compatible even when transitioning from a linear hex element to a quadratic tet element.


7-70

SOLID95

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Hex-to-tet meshing is valid for both quadratic-to-quadratic and linear-to-quadratic transitions. Element type must support a 9-node pyramid for the latter.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Hex Mesh Transition Layer Tet Mesh

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Quadraticto

Quadratic NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

10-Node Tet13-Node Pyramid20-Node Hex


Linearto

Quadratic


7-71

8-Node Hex 9-Node Pyramid 10-Node Tet

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Procedure involves four steps:

1 C t th h h

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

1. Create the hex mesh.– Start by map-meshing the regular-shaped volumes. (Or mesh the

shared areas with quads.)– For stress analysis, use either an 8-node brick (SOLID45 or SOLID185) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y , ( )or a 20-node brick (SOLID95 or SOLID186).

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-72

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

2. Activate an element type that supports both pyramids and tets.– These are usually brick elements that can degenerate into pyramids

d t t Ch k th El t M l il bl li t fi d t

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

and tets. Check the Elements Manual, available on-line, to find out which element types are valid.

– Examples:• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89• Thermal SOLID90• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-73

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

3. Generate the tet mesh.– First activate free meshing.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Then mesh the volumes that are to be tet-meshed.

Pyramids are automatically generated at the interface. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-74

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

4. Convert degenerate tets to true 10-node tets.– The tet mesh created by the transition mesher consists of degenerate

l t 10 d t t h d d i d f 20 d b i k f

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

elements — 10-node tetrahedra derived from 20-node bricks, for example.

– These elements are not as efficient as true 10-node tets such as SOLID92, which use less memory and write smaller files during O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

solution.– To convert the degenerate tets into true tets:

• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Modify Mesh > Change TetsO th TCHG d

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Or use the TCHG command.



7-75

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume hextet.db

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Show element type list using Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete. There are two element types: SOLID45 & 95

– Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,1 (size)– Map-mesh the regular shaped volume

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Map mesh the regular shaped volume– Set element type to 2, and activate tet-meshing– Free-mesh the other volume– Convert degenerate tets to SOLID92 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Show element type list. There are now three element types.– Select elements of type 2 (SOLID95 pyramids) and plot elements



7-76

Training Manual


K. Mesh ExtrusionIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• When you extrude an area into a volume, you can extrude the area elements along with it, resulting in a meshed volume. This is called mesh extrusion. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Advantage: Easy to create a volume mesh with all bricks (hexahedra) or a combination of bricks and prisms.

O S f f

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Obvious requirement: Shape of the volume must lend itself to extrusion.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPExtrude Part 1



7-77

Training Manual


…Mesh ExtrusionIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Procedure

1 D fi t l t t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Define two element types — an area element and a volume element.

– Area element: Choose MESH200 quadrilaterals. MESH200 is a mesh- O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

qonly (Not Solved) element and has no DOFs or material properties associated with it.

– Volume element: Should be NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Volume element: Should be compatible with the MESH200 element type. For example, if you choose midside nodes for MESH200, the 3-D solid element should also Part 1


the 3 D solid element should also have midside nodes.

– ET command or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element

T Add/Edit/D l t


7-78

Type > Add/Edit/Delete

Training Manual


…Mesh ExtrusionIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

2. Mesh the area to be extruded with MESH200 elements.– Use mapped or free meshing with desired mesh density.

Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool

3. Choose element extrusion options.

EXTOPT command or Main Menu >

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– EXTOPT command or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext Opts

– Typical options are:• Active TYPE attribute (should be 3-D N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Active TYPE attribute (should be 3-D solid).

• Number of element divisions in the extrusion direction (i.e, number of elements through the thickness). Must Part 1


g )be greater than zero; otherwise, only the area will be extruded, without elements.


7-79

Training Manual


…Mesh ExtrusionIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

4. Extrude the area.– First delete concatenated lines, if any. If concatenations are present,

ANSYS ill t ll th t i ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

ANSYS will not allow the extrusion operation.• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Concatenate > Del Concats > Lines

– Then extrude the area using any of the extrusion methods. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



7-80

Training Manual


…Mesh ExtrusionIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume ribgeom.db O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Bring up the Element Types dialog, delete PLANE82 element type, and replace it with MESH200 4-node quad

– Also add SOLID45 as element type 2– Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE 0 1

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,0.1– Choose free quad-meshing and mesh the area– Set extrusion options: TYPE=2, number of element divisions = 4– Rotate view to ISO N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Extrude area along normal with offset = 0.4– Save the database to ribvol.db



7-81

Training Manual


L. Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Sweep meshing is yet another option available for volume meshing. It is the process of meshing an existing volume by

i h

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

sweeping an area mesh.

• Similar to mesh extrusion, except that the volume already exists in this case (from a geometry import, for example). O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

( g y p , p )

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-82

Training Manual


…Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Advantages:– Easy to create a volume mesh with all

b i k (h h d ) bi ti

Target surface(1 area)

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

bricks (hexahedra) or a combination of bricks and prisms.

– Option to tet-mesh volumes that are not “sweepable.” Transition

S f

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

pyramids are automatically generated.

• Requirements:

Source surface(1 area)

Valid for sweep meshing NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

q– Topology of the volume must be

consistent in the sweep direction. Example: a block with a through hole (ok even if the hole is tapered)


(ok even if the hole is tapered).– Source and target surfaces must be

single areas. Concatenated areas are not allowed for either the source or the target


7-83

the target.Not valid for sweep meshing

Training Manual


…Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Procedure

• Define and activate a 3-D hexahedral solid element

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Define and activate a 3-D hexahedral solid element type, such as structural SOLID45 or SOLID95.

• Bring up MeshTool and choose Hex/Wedge and Sweep. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Choose how the source and target surfaces are identified:

– “Auto Source/Target” means that ANSYS will automatically choose them based on the volume’s topology N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

choose them based on the volume s topology.– “Pick Source/Target” means that you will be choosing

them.

• Press the SWEEP button and follow prompt Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

Press the SWEEP button and follow prompt instructions from the picker. (Or use VSWEEPcommand.)


7-84

Training Manual


…Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Tet-Mesh Option

A f l ti i t t t t

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• A useful sweep option is to generate a tet-mesh in non-sweepable volumes.

• To use this option: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p– Make sure that the element type supports

degenerate pyramid and tetrahedron shapes. Examples:

• Structural SOLID95 186 VISCO89

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89• Thermal SOLID90• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122

– Choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

> Mesh > Volume Sweep > Sweep Opts and activate the tet-mesh option. (Or use the EXTOPT,VSWE command.)


7-85

Training Manual


…Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Notes

T h l l d t li it l

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To map-mesh a complex volume, you may need to slice it several times and also do some area and line concatenations. For sweep meshing, you typically need only a few slicing operations, and noconcatenations are needed! O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• You can control the source area mesh using standard mesh controls. SmartSizing is generally not recommended since it is meant for free meshing

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

meant for free meshing.



7-86

Training Manual


…Sweep MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume ribvol.db

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Clear all volumes and all areas, then plot volumes– Bring up MeshTool and activate sweep meshing– Sweep mesh the volume O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-87

Training Manual


M. F.E. ImportsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In addition to solid model geometry, ANSYS can also import finite element model data (nodes and elements) from certain packages. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The most common approach is for the software vendor to “write out” the nodes and elements in a format that ANSYS can read (using NREAD and EREAD). This format is published in the O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

( g ) pANSYS Programmer’s Manual.

• Some software packages provide an interface that allows you to transfer more than just nodes and elements from another finite

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

transfer more than just nodes and elements from another finite element package into ANSYS.



7-88

Training Manual


N. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• This workshop consists of five exercises:W7B. Pillow Block O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W7C. Connecting RodW7D. Cotter PinW7E. ImpellerW7F Wheel

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

W7F. Wheel

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



7-89

Chapter 8

Defining the Material

Training Manual

Chapter 8– Defining the Material

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In this chapter, we discuss units, importing ANSYS defined materials, as well as describe how to define a user defined

t i l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

material.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



8-2

Training Manual

Chapter 8 – Defining the Material

A. UNITSIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

A Note on Units

Y d t d t t ll ANSYS th t f it i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• You do not need to tell ANSYS the system of units you are using. Simply decide what units you will use, then make sure all of your input is consistent.

– For example, if the model geometry is in inches, make sure that all

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

For example, if the model geometry is in inches, make sure that all other input data — material properties, real constants, loads, etc. —are in terms of inches.

• ANSYS does NOT do units conversion! It simply accepts all NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• ANSYS does NOT do units conversion! It simply accepts all numbers you input without questioning their validity.

• The command /UNITS allows you to specify a units system, but it Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

is simply a recording device to let other users of your model know what units you used.


8-3

Training Manual


B. ANSYS Defined MaterialsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Using the Material Library

• This method allows you to choose a predefined set of properties for a

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• This method allows you to choose a predefined set of properties for a given material.

• ANSYS supplies typical structural and thermal properties (linear only) for some common materials but we strongly recommend that you create your

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

some common materials, but we strongly recommend that you create your own material library.

• To choose a material from the library:– First define the library path. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

y p• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Library > Library Path

– Enter the location from which to READ material data, e.g, \v100\ANSYS\matlib.• Or use the /MPLIB command. Part 1



8-4

Training Manual


…ANSYS Defined MaterialIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Then “import” a material from the library.• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material

Library > Import Library OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Choose the units system. This is used only to filter the list of files shown in the subsequent dialog. ANSYS has no knowledge of units and does NOT do unit conversion

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

and does NOT do unit conversion.– Choose the desired material file,

such as steel AISI C1020.• Or use the MPREAD command with the

LIB option

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

LIB option.



8-5

Training Manual


C. Material Model GUIIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Specifying Individual Material Properties

• Instead of choosing a material name this method involves directly

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Instead of choosing a material name, this method involves directly specifying the required properties through the Material Model GUI.

• To specify individual properties:Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Models

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Models• Double-click on the appropriate property to be defined.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



8-6

Training Manual


…Material Model GUIIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Work through the tree structure to the material t t b d fi d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

type to be defined.

• Then enter the individual property values. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p p y

• Or use the MP command.– mp,ex,1,30e6

mp prxy 1 3

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– mp,prxy,1,.3



8-7

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Add temperature dependent properties O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Graph properties vs. temperature

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



8-8

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Copy material models from one table to another O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Delete material models

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



8-9

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Material GUI Favorites Option• Stores shortcuts to groups of

f tl d t i l ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

frequently used material properties.

• Allows you to define a template based on the currently selected model in the database, then specify O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

, p yyour own name for the template (which can be a useful descriptor such as "Steel" or "Metal Plasticity").

D t ifi d t i l

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Does not save specified materials and related data. It does, however, save your Favorites template to the ANSYS registry file for use in all

b t l


subsequent analyses.


8-10

Training Manual


D. Listing Defined MaterialsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• The Material Model GUI shows one material at a time. Multiple material properties can be listed by: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Utility Menu > List > Properties > All Materials– Or, use the MPLIST command

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


– Note, Nonlinear material properties can be listed using Utility Menu > List Properties > Data Tables or via the TBLIST command.


8-11

Training Manual


E. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• This workshop consists of two exercises:W8A. User Input Material O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W8B. Material Library Input

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



8-12

Chapter 9

Loading

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The solution step is where we apply loads on the object and let the solver calculate the finite element solution. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Loads are available both in the Preprocessor and Solution menus.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



9-2

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

A. Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are five categories of loads:DOF Constraints Specified DOF values, such as displacements

i t l i t t i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

in a stress analysis or temperatures in a thermal analysis.

Concentrated Loads Point loads, such as forces or heat flow rates.Surface Loads Loads distributed over a surface, such as O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

,pressures or convections.

Body Loads Volumetric or field loads, such as temperatures (causing thermal expansion) or internal heat generation. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

generation.Inertia Loads Loads due to structural mass or inertia, such

as gravity and rotational velocity.



9-3

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

…Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• You can apply loads either on the solid model or directly on the FEA model (nodes and elements). O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Solid model loads are easier to apply because there are fewer entities to pick.

– Moreover, solid model loads are independent of the mesh. You don’t need to reapply the loads if you change the mesh. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

pp y y g

Pressures on element facesPressure on line NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPConstraints

t dConstraint

li


at nodes

FEA model

on line

Solid model


9-4

Force at nodeForce at keypoint

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

…Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Regardless of how you apply the loads, the solver expects all loads to be in terms of the finite element model. Therefore, solid

d l l d t ti ll t f d t th d l i d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

model loads are automatically transferred to the underlying nodes and elements during solution.

• Solid Model Loads can be transferred to the finite element mesh ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

manually before solving by using the SBCTRAN command. This can be useful to see all of the loads, both solid model and FE, that have been applied.

F l if i li d t l t f th l t

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– For example, if a pressure is applied to an area, a plot of the elements will not show the pressure until the SBCTRAN command is issued or the model is solved.



9-5

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

B. Nodal Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

• All forces, displacements, and other direction-dependent nodal quantities are interpreted in the nodal coordinate system. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Input quantities:• Forces and moments FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ• Displacement constraints UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ

C li d t i t ti

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Coupling and constraint equations• Etc.

– Output quantities:• Calculated displacements UX UY UZ ROTX ROTY ROTZ N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Calculated displacements UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ• Reaction forces FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ• Etc. Part 1



9-6

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

...Nodal Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A nodal coordinate system is attached to every node in the model.

B d f lt th d l CS i ll l t Gl b l C t i i ll

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• By default, the nodal CS is parallel to Global Cartesian, i.e, all applied forces and displacement constraints are interpreted in Global Cartesian by default. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NY NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Yn

Xn

YnXn

Yn


XY

XYn

Xnn


9-7

X Xn

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading


TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• If necessary, you can rotatethe nodal CS to a different

i t ti

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

orientation.

For example:– To simulate an inclined roller

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

To simulate an inclined roller support.

– To apply radial forces.– To apply radial constraints

(perhaps to simulate a rigid

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

(perhaps to simulate a rigid, press-fitted pin).



9-8

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading


TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

• To “rotate nodes,” use this four-step procedure:1. Select the desired nodes. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

2. Activate the coordinate system (or create a local CS) into which you want to rotate the nodes, e.g, CSYS,1.

3. Choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling >

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

3. Choose Main Menu Preprocessor Modeling Move/Modify > Rotate Node CS > To Active CS, then press [Pick All] in the picker.Or issue NROTAT,ALL.

4 Reactivate all nodes

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Note: When you apply symmetry on anti-symmetry boundary conditions, ANSYS automatically rotates all nodes on that boundary.

4. Reactivate all nodes.

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• Very Important: Nodal Coordinate Systems ALWAYS behave in a

Cartesian manner. NROTAT simply aligns the nodal CS with a global or local CS. Consequently, remember that (a) there is no dependency


9-9

or association of a nodal CS with a global/local CS to which it is rotated and (b) the nodal CS still acts as a Cartesian CS.

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading


TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume rib.db.

Off t ki l t t f b tt i l ( i k i t l ti )

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Offset working plane to center of bottom circle (using average keypoint location).– Create local cylindrical CS at working plane origin.– Select nodes at radius = 0.35 and plot them.– Rotate all selected nodes into active system. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Apply a UX displacement constraint (or an FX force) at all selected nodes. Note the radial direction.

– Now activate global Cartesian (CSYS,0).– Rotate all selected nodes into active system. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Replot, and note the new direction of the loads.



9-10

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

C. Displacement ConstraintsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Displacement constraints are also used to enforce symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Symmetry BC: Out-of-plane displacements and in-plane rotations are fixed.

– Antisymmetry BC: In-plane displacements and out-of-plane rotations are fixed. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Y

X Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

Antisymmetry BoundaryUY=UZ=0

Symmetry BoundaryUX=0


9-11

UY=UZ=0ROTX=0

UX=0ROTY=ROTZ=0

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

D. Concentrated ForcesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A force is a concentrated load (or “point load”) that you can apply at

d k i t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

a node or keypoint.

• Point loads such as forces are appropriate for line element O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

pp pmodels such as beams, spars, and springs.

In solid and shell models point

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

In solid and shell models, point loads usually cause a stress singularity, but are acceptable if you ignore stresses in the vicinity. Part 1


Remember, you can use select logic to “ignore” the elements in the vicinity of the point load.


9-12

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

...Concentrated ForcesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In the 2-D quarter symmetry solid model shown at bottom left, notice that maximum stress SMAX (23,590) is reported at the location of the force. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

When the nodes and elements in the vicinity of the force are unselected, SMAX (12,281) moves to the bottom left corner, which is another singularity due to the reentry corner. Reflected about x-z plane

half symmetry model

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

half symmetry model

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPreentry corner Part 1



9-13

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

…Concentrated ForcesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

By unselecting nodes and elements near the bottom left corner, you get the expected stress distribution with SMAX (7,945) near th t h l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

the top hole.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



9-14

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

…Concentrated ForcesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Note that for axisymmetric models:

• Input values of forces are based on the full 360°

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Input values of forces are based on the full 360 .

• Output values (reaction forces) are also based on the full 360°.

• For example suppose a cylindrical shell of radius r has an edge load of P

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• For example, suppose a cylindrical shell of radius r has an edge load of P lb/in. To apply this load on a 2-D axisymmetric shell model (SHELL51 elements, for example), you would specify a force of 2πrP.

P lb/in 2πrP lb NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


r


9-15

Training Manual

Chapter 9 - Loading

E. Verifying LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Verifying applied loads

Pl t th b ti ti l d b l

y gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Plot them by activating load symbols:– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Symbols– Commands -- /PBC, /PSF, /PBF O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Or list them:– Utility Menu > List > Loads >

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



9-16

Chapter 10

Solution

Training Manual

Chapter 10 – Solution

A. SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The function of the solver is to solve the system of linear simultaneous equations representing the structure’s degrees of f d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

freedom.

• The solution could take anywhere from a few seconds to several hours depending primarily on the size of the model, the solver O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p g p y ,selected, and the speed of your computer.

• A linear static analysis with one load step requires only one such solution but a nonlinear or transient analysis may require tens

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

solution, but a nonlinear or transient analysis may require tens, hundreds, or even thousands of solutions.

Therefore, the type of solver you choose for solution can be quite Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

important.

December 17, 2004Inventory #002170

10-2

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The solvers available in ANSYS can be categorized into four types:

1) Direct elimination

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1) Direct elimination2) Iterative3) Distributed ANSYS †

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

1) Direct elimination solvers• Sparse (default)• Frontal

2) Iterative solvers NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

2) Iterative solvers• PCG (Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient)• ICCG (Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient)• JCG (Jacobi Conjugate Gradient)

AMG (Al b i M lti id) † ( l M t i S l ti Di t ib t d Sh d M )


• AMG (Algebraic Multigrid) † - (only Matrix Solution Distributed on Shared Memory)


10-3

† Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

3) Distributed ANSYS (D-ANSYS) (all of the ANSYS /SOLUTION phase is in parallel which includes stiffness matrix generation, linear equation solving and results calculation) O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient † (EQSLVE, DPCG)• Distributed Jacobi Conjugate Gradient † (EQSLVE, DJCG)• Distributed Sparse Solver † (EQSLVE, DSPARSE)

– Factorization of the matrix and back/forward substitution is done in distributed parallel mode O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Existing Shared Memory Sparse Solver (EQSLVE,SPARSE) – The solver itself runs only on the master process (other parts run in distributed

parallel)– May be run in shared memory parallel mode on the master machine

(/CONFIG,NPROC,N) NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

( , , )

A general discussion of direct and iterative solvers will be covered in the next slides.



10-4

† Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Calculate the solution as follows:

1 Formulate individual element matricesFormulate element

t i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Formulate individual element matrices.2. Assemble the global stiffness matrix.3a. (Sparse direct solver) Factorize the stiffness

matrix, then calculate DOF solution from back-substitution

matrices

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

back-substitution.3b. (Iterative Solver) Start with an assumed zero

value for all DOF and iterate to convergence (based on an input tolerance on residual force).

Assembleglobal matrix

.fullfile N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

4. Use element matrices to calculate the element solution.

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Solve matrix

equation.rst /.rth

file


10-5

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Direct solver vs. Iterative solver (simplified discussion)

• If given the linear static case of [K]{x} = {F}, Direct solvers factorize [K] to solve for OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

g [ ]{ } { } [ ][K]-1. Then, {x} = [K]-1{F}.

– This factorization is computationally expensive but is done once.

• Iterative solvers use a preconditioner [Q] to solve the equation [Q][K]{x} = [Q]{F}. A th t [Q] [K] 1 I thi t i i l [I]{ } [K] 1{F} H th

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Assume that [Q] = [K]-1. In this trivial case, [I]{x} = [K]-1{F}. However, the preconditioner is not usually [K]-1. The closer [Q] is to [K]-1, the better the preconditioning is. However, the preconditioner is not usually [K]-1, so this process is repeated - hence the name, iterative solver.

– For iterative solvers, matrix multiplication (not factorization) is performed. This is NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

For iterative solvers, matrix multiplication (not factorization) is performed. This is much faster than matrix inversion if done entirely in RAM, so, as long as the number of iterations is not very high (which happens for well-conditioned matrices), iterative solvers can be more efficient than sparse solvers.

– The main difference between the iterative solvers in ANSYS — PCG, JCG, ICCG Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

— is the type of pre-conditioner used.


10-6

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OOD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-7

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Parallel Performance solvers (special license required)

• AMG (Algebraic Multigrid)

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

AMG (Algebraic Multigrid)– Iterative solver that can be used in single and multiprocessor environments

• DDS (Distributed Domain Solver)– Decomposes large models into smaller domains, and then sends those domains

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p g ,to multiple processors for solving. The DDS solver is scalable, intended for large static or full transient analyses, with symmetric matrices that do not involve inertia relief or problems using the probabilistic design system (PDS).

• DPCG (Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Solver)

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• DPCG (Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Solver)– Based on the PCG solver. Preserves all of the merits of the PCG solver and can

be run on either shared memory or distributed memory machines with superior scalability to the PCG solver. Part 1


• DJCG (Distributed Jacobi Conjugate Gradient Solver)

– Iterative equation solver based on the JCG solver. Scalability of this solver is superior to the JCG solver with little extra memory required. DJCG solver is available only for static and full transient analyses where the stiffness is


10-8

symmetric.

Training Manual


…SolversIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To choose a solver:– Main Menu > Solution > Analysis Type > Sol’n Controls, then choose Sol’n

O ti t b

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Options tab– Or use EQSLV command

The default is to use a “program chosen” solver [eqslv,-1], which ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

p g [ q , ],is usually the sparse direct solver.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-9

Training Manual

Chapter 10 – Loading & Solution

B. DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• What is a loadstep and a substep?

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOForce

Loadstep 1 Loadstep 2 Loadstep 3 Loadstep 4 Loadstep 5

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN20

25

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

10

15

orce

(lbs

) A loadstep can be defined as one set of loading conditions for which you obtain a solution


5

10

Fo Substep 1 of Loadstep 2solution.

A substep can be defined as a subdivision of a loadstep.


10-10

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

time (seconds)

Training Manual


C. Multiple LoadstepsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The procedure to solve for one set of loading conditions (i.e, one load step) is as follows: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Import or create the model– Mesh it– Apply loads

Solve (one load step)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Solve (one load step)– Review results

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-11

Training Manual


…Multiple LoadstepsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• If you have multiple loading conditions, you can choose one of two ways: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Solve for all loads together in a single load step

– Or apply each loading condition separately and solve multiple load steps. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p p

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-12

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• By using multiple load steps, you can:– “isolate” the structure’s response to each loading condition. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– combine these responses in any desired fashion during postprocessing, allowing you to study different “what-if” scenarios. (This is called load case combination and is valid for linear analyses only. Load case combinations are covered in a later chapter.) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• There are two ways to define and solve multiple load steps:– Multiple solve method

Load step file method

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Load step file method



10-13

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Multiple Solve Method

• An extension of the single-load-step Import or create the model

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• An extension of the single-load-step solution, where you solve each load step sequentially without leaving the Solution processor.

– Import or create the model– Mesh it– Apply loads– Solve (load step 1)

A l diff t l d

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Best suited for batch mode.

• When used in interactive mode, this method is useful only for models that

– Apply different loads– Solve (load step 2)– Apply different loads– Solve (load step 3) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

method is useful only for models that solve quickly. – Etc.

– Review results



10-14

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Load Step File Method

• In this case instead of solving each load Import or create the model

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• In this case, instead of solving each load step, you write the load step information to a file, called the load step file:

– Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts > Write LS File

– Import or create the model– Mesh it– Apply loads– Write to LS file (.s01)

A l diff t l d

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

LS File– Or use LSWRITE command.

• The load step file is named jobname.s01, s02 s03 etc

– Apply different loads– Write to LS file (.s02)– Apply different loads– Write to LS file (.s03) N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

.s02, .s03, etc.

• After all load steps have been written out, you can use one command — LSSOLVE or Main Menu > Solution > Solve > From LS Files

– Etc.– Solve from LS files– Review results


Main Menu > Solution > Solve > From LS Files— to read in each file sequentially and solve it.


10-15

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The advantage of the load step file method is that you can interactively set up all load steps even for a large model and then

l th hil f th t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

solve them while you are away from the computer.

• Note: The loading commands on the load step file are always in terms of nodes and elements, even if you apply loads on the solid O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

, y pp ymodel.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-16

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• For both methods:– It is recommended that the user specify a new title prior

t SOLVE (M lti l S l M th d) d LSWRITE (L d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

to SOLVE (Multiple Solve Method) and LSWRITE (Load Step File Method) since /TITLE is saved in the results file for each load step.

– Loads applied in a previous load step will stay in the ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

database unless they are deleted. So be sure to delete any loads that are not part of the current load step.

– Results for each load step are appended to the results file and identified as load step 1, load step 2, etc. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

p , p ,– In postprocessing, you first “read in” the desired set of

results and then review them.– The database contains the loads and results for the last

load step that was solved


load step that was solved.


10-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume rib.db

Fi l ft li i UX d b tt li i UY

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Fix left line in UX and bottom line in UY– Apply pressure = 100 on top line– Write LS file 1, then list it and show F.E. load commands– Apply pressure = 50 to 100 (tapered) on right line O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Delete the top pressure load– Write LS file 2– LSSOLVE,1,2– Review results for each load step separately N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



10-18

Training Manual


D. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• This workshop consists of three exercises:W10A. 3-D Bracket O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W10B. Connecting RodW10C. Wheel

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



10-19

Chapter 11

Structural Analysis

Training Manual

Chapter 11 – Structural Analysis

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In this chapter, we will describe the specifics of a structural analysis. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The purpose is two-fold:– To reiterate the general analysis procedure.– To introduce you to structural loads and boundary conditions

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

To introduce you to structural loads and boundary conditions

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



11-2

Training Manual

Chapter 11 – A. Preprocessing

GeometryIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Geometry

C ith b t d ithi ANSYS i t d

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Can either be created within ANSYS or imported.

• Include details to improve results:– Goal is to sufficiently model the stiffness of the structure

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Goal is to sufficiently model the stiffness of the structure– Add details to avoid stress singularities (e.g. fillets)– Exclude details not in region of interest (e.g. exclude small holes)– Add details to improve boundary conditions (e.g. apply pressure to an N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

area rather than using concentrated load)



11-3

Training Manual


MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Element type• The table below shows commonly used structural element types.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

y yp• The nodal DOF’s may include: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ.

Commonly used structural element types2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Linear PLANE42 SOLID45 SHELL63 BEAM3PLANE182 SOLID185 SHELL181 BEAM4

BEAM188Quadratic PLANE2 SOLID95 SHELL93 BEAM189 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP• Material propertiesMinimum requirement is Young’s Modulus EX If Poisson’s Ratio is

PLANE82 SOLID92PLANE183 SOLID186


– Minimum requirement is Young s Modulus, EX. If Poisson s Ratio is not entered a default of 0.3 will be assumed.

– Setting preferences to “Structural” limits the Material Model GUI to display only structural properties.


11-4

• Real constants and Section properties– Primarily needed for shell and line elements.

Training Manual

Chapter 11 – B. Solution

Define LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Structural loading conditions can be:

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

DOF Constraints Regions of the model where displacements are known.

Concentrated Forces External forces that can be simplified as a point load. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Pressures Surfaces where forces on an area are known.

Uniform Temperature Temperatures applied as a body force used with a reference t t t di t th l t i

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

temperature to predict thermal strains.

Gravity Accelerations applied as inertia boundary conditions



11-5

Training Manual


Displacement ConstraintsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Displacement Constraints

• Used to specify where the model is fixed (zero displacement locations)

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Used to specify where the model is fixed (zero displacement locations).

• Can also be non-zero, to simulate a known deflection.

T l di l t t i t

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• To apply displacement constraints :– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply

> Structural > Displacement• Choose where you want to apply the

constraint NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

constraint.• Pick the desired entities in the

graphics window.• Then choose the constraint direction.

Value defaults to zero. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– Or use the D family of commands: DK, DL, DA, D.

• Question: In which coordinate system are UX UY and UZ interpreted?


11-6

are UX, UY, and UZ interpreted?

Training Manual


Concentrated ForcesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To apply a force, the following information is needed:– node or keypoint number (which you can identify by picking) O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– force magnitude (which should be consistent with the system of units you are using)

– direction of the force — FX, FY, or FZ ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Use:– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Force/Moment– Or the commands FK or F N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Question: In which coordinate system are FX, FY, and FZ interpreted? Part 1



11-7

Training Manual


PressureIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Pressures

T l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To apply a pressure:– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply

Structural > Pressure• Choose where you want to apply the

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Choose where you want to apply the pressure -- usually on lines for 2-D models, on areas for 3-D models.

• Pick the desired entities in the graphics window

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

window.• Then enter the pressure value.

A positive value indicates a compressive pressure (acting towards Part 1


the centroid of the element).– Or use the SF family of commands: SFL,

SFA, SFE, SF.


11-8

Training Manual


…PressureIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• For a 2-D model, where pressures are usually applied on a line, you

if t d500

L3500 O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

can specify a tapered pressure by entering a value for both the I and J ends of the line. VALI = 500

L3

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• I and J are determined by the line direction. If you see the taper going in the wrong direction, simply reapply the pressure with VALI = 500

L3

1000500

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

simply reapply the pressure with the values reversed.

VALI = 500VALJ = 1000

1000 Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

VALI = 1000VALJ = 500

L3500


11-9

Training Manual


Uniform temperatureIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Uniform Temperature

T d fi if t t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To define uniform temperature– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Temperature > Uniform Temp– Or use the TUNIF command

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Or use the TUNIF command.

)( refth TT −=αε• Recall, NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• To define reference temperature– Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts > Other > Reference Temp– Or use the TREF command or as MP REFT


– Or use the TREF command or as MP,REFT


11-10

Training Manual


GravityIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Gravity

T l it ti l l ti

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To apply gravitational acceleration:– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads >

Apply > Structural > Inertia > Gravity– Or use the ACEL command. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Notes:– A positive acceleration value causes deflection in the negative

direction. If Y is pointing upwards, for example, a positive ACELY NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

value will cause the structure to move downwards.– Density (or mass in some form) must be defined for gravity and other

inertia loads.– Acceleration can also be applied on an element component with the Part 1


Acceleration can also be applied on an element component with the CMACEL command.


11-11

Training Manual


Modifying and Deleting LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Modifying and Deleting Loads

T dif l d l i l l th l d

y g gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To modify a load value, simply reapply the load with the new value.

• To delete loads: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete– When you delete solid model loads, ANSYS also

automatically deletes all corresponding finite element loads N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

element loads.



11-12

Training Manual


Solutions OptionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Static vs. Dynamic Analysis

A t ti l i th t l th tiff f

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A static analysis assumes that only the stiffness forces are significant.

• A dynamic analysis takes into account all three types of forces. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y y yp

• For example, consider the analysis of a diving board.– If the diver is standing still, it might be sufficient to do N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

g , ga static analysis.

– But if the diver is jumping up and down, you will need to do a dynamic analysis. Part 1



11-13

Training Manual


Solutions OptionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Inertia and damping forces are usually significant if the applied loads vary rapidly with time. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Therefore you can use time-dependency of loads as a way to choose between static and dynamic analysis.

– If the loading is constant over a relatively long period of time, choose

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

If the loading is constant over a relatively long period of time, choose a static analysis.

– Otherwise, choose a dynamic analysis.

• In general if the excitation frequency is less than 1/3 of the

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• In general, if the excitation frequency is less than 1/3 of the structure’s lowest natural frequency, a static analysis may be acceptable.



11-14

Training Manual


Solutions OptionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Linear vs. Nonlinear Analysis

A li l i th t th l di li ibl

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A linear analysis assumes that the loading causes negligible changes to the stiffness of the structure. Typical characteristics are:

– Small deflections

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Small deflections– Strains and stresses within the elastic limit– No abrupt changes in stiffness such as two bodies coming into and

out of contact NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPStress Part 1


Elastic modulus(EX)


11-15

Strain

Training Manual


Solutions OptionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A nonlinear analysis is needed if the loading causes significant changes in the structure’s stiffness. Typical reasons for stiffness t h i ifi tl

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

to change significantly are:– Strains beyond the elastic limit (plasticity)– Large deflections, such as with a loaded fishing rod– Contact between two bodies

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Contact between two bodies

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Stress


Strain


11-16

Training Manual

Chapter 11 – C. Postprocessing

Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Reviewing results of a stress analysis generally involves:– Deformed shape O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Stresses– Reaction forces

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Deformed Shape

• Gives a quick indication of whether the loads were applied in the NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

correct direction.

• Legend column shows the maximum displacement, DMX. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

• You can also animate the deformation.


11-17

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To plot the deformed shape:– General Postproc > Plot

R lt D f d Sh

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Results > Deformed Shape– Or use the PLDISP command.

• For animation: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Animate > Deformed Shape

– Or use the ANDISPcommand

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

command.



11-18

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Stresses

Th f ll i t t i ll il bl f 3 D lid

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The following stresses are typically available for a 3-D solid model:

– Component stresses — SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ (global Cartesian directions by default) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y )– Principal stresses — S1, S2, S3, SEQV (von Mises), SINT (stress

intensity)

• Best viewed as contour plots which allow you to quickly locate NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Best viewed as contour plots, which allow you to quickly locate “hot spots” or trouble regions.

– Nodal solution: Stresses are averaged at the nodes, showing smooth, continuous contours. Part 1


– Element solution: No averaging, resulting in discontinuous contours.


11-19

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To plot stress contours:– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu or PLNSOL command

General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu or PLESOL command

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu or PLESOL command

• You can also animate stress contours:– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Animate > Deformed Results... or ANCNTR command O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



11-20

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

A Note on PowerGraphics

• It is the default graphics setting (/GRAPH POWER)

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• It is the default graphics setting (/GRAPH,POWER).

• Plots only the visible surfaces and ignores everything “underneath.” O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Advantages:– Faster REPLOT, crisp graphics.– Smooth, almost photo-realistic displays.

Prevents stress averaging across material and real

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Prevents stress averaging across material and real constant boundaries.

• To deactivate PowerGraphics (or activate “full graphics”):


graphics ):– Toolbar > POWRGRPH– Or issue /GRAPH,FULL– Or interactively, Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>

HiddenLineOptions> Graphics Display Method is Full Model


11-21

HiddenLineOptions> Graphics Display Method is...Full Model

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Reaction Forces

Th f th ti f i h di ti t l th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The sum of the reaction forces in each direction must equal the sum of applied loads in that direction.

• Best viewed as a listing: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g– General Postprocessor > List Results > Reaction Solution or PRRSOL

command

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

This example had an applied pressureof 1000 psi in the Y direction over a10” x 10” area, which results in reactionforces at nodes where constraints were


forces at nodes where constraints wereapplied. Notice that the total value offorce in the X and Z directions are zero,and the Y direction is 1000*(10x10) = 0.1e6.


11-22

Training Manual


Verify ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

It is always a good idea to do a “sanity check” and make sure that the solution is acceptable. What you need to check depends on the type of problem you are solving but here are some typical

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

the type of problem you are solving, but here are some typical questions to ask:

• Do FEA results agree with hand calculations or experimental data?

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

data?

• Is the displacement solution correct? Check the FEA displacement solution first since FEA stresses are second order

lt

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

results.

• Do the reaction forces balance the applied loads?


• Where is the maximum stress located?– If it is at a singularity, such as a point load or a re-entrant corner, the

value is generally meaningless. – Are the stress values beyond the elastic limit?


11-23

y– If so, the load magnitudes may be wrong, or you may need to do a

nonlinear analysis.

Training Manual


…Verify ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Is the mesh adequate?– This is always debatable, but you can gain confidence in the mesh by

i ti ti

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

using error estimation.– Other ways to check mesh adequacy:

• Plot the element solution (unaveraged stresses) and look for elements with high stress gradients. These regions are candidates

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

elements with high stress gradients. These regions are candidates for mesh refinement.

• If there is a significant difference between the nodal (averaged) and element (unaveraged) stress contours, the mesh may be too coarse N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

coarse.• Similarly, if there is a significant difference between

PowerGraphics and full graphics stresses, the mesh may be too coarse. Part 1


• Re-mesh with twice as many elements, re-solve, and compare the results. (But this may not always be practical.)


11-24

Training Manual

Chapter 11 – D. Workshops

WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• This workshop consists of two problems:11A. Lathe Cutter O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

11B. 2-D Corner Bracket Tutorial

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



11-25

Chapter 12

Thermal Analysis

Training Manual

Chapter 12 – Thermal Analysis

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In this chapter, we will describe the specifics of a thermal analysis.

Th i t f ld

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The purpose is two-fold:– To reiterate the general analysis procedure.– To introduce you to thermal loads and boundary conditions O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



12-2

Training Manual


GeometryIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Geometry

C ith b t d ithi ANSYS i t d

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Can either be created within ANSYS or imported.

• Include details to improve results:– Goal is to sufficiently model the thermal mass of the structure.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Goal is to sufficiently model the thermal mass of the structure.– Convection loads requires areas be correctly modeled.– Heat generation loads requires the volumes be correctly modeled.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



12-3

Training Manual


MeshingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Element type• The table below shows commonly used thermal element types.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The nodal DOF is: TEMP.

Commonly used thermal element types2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Linear PLANE55 SOLID70 SHELL57 LINK31, 32, 33, 34SHELL131

Quadratic PLANE77 SOLID90 SHELL132PLANE35 SOLID87

Linear PLANE55 SOLID70 SHELL57 LINK31, 32, 33, 34SHELL131

Quadratic PLANE77 SOLID90 SHELL132PLANE35 SOLID87 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Material properties– Minimum requirement is Kx, thermal conductivity for steady state

analysis


analysis.– Setting preferences to “thermal” limits the Material Model GUI to

display only Thermal properties.

R l t t / S ti tiFebruary 7, 2006

Inventory #00226812-4

• Real constants / Section properties– Primarily needed for shell and line elements.

Training Manual


OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Thermal loading conditions can be:Temperatures Regions of the model where temperatures are known. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Heat flow Points where the heat flow rate is known.

Heat flux Surfaces where the heat flow rate per unit area is known. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Convections Surfaces where heat is transferred to (or from) surroundings by means of convection. Input consists of film coefficient h and bulk temperature of the surrounding fluid Tb. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

fluid Tb.

Heat generation Regions where the volumetric heat generation rate is known. Part 1


Adiabatic surfaces “Perfectly insulated” surfaces where no heat transfer takes place.

Radiation* Surfaces where heat transfer occurs by means of radiation


12-5

Radiation Surfaces where heat transfer occurs by means of radiation. Input consists of emissivity, Stefan-Boltzmann constant, and optionally, temperature at a “space node.”

* Not covered in this course

Training Manual


Nodal Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

y

• Unlike the structural analysis displacement and force boundary conditions, the analogous thermal analysis temperature and heat fl b d diti t d d t th d l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

flow boundary conditions are not dependent on the nodal coordinate system.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-6

Training Manual


Temperature ConstraintsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Temperature Constraints

• Used to specify a known temperature in the model

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Used to specify a known temperature in the model.

• To apply displacement constraints :– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

pp yThermal > Temperature

• Choose where you want to apply the constraint.

• Pick the desired entities in the graphics NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

g pwindow.

• Then enter the temperature value. Value defaults to zero.

– Or use the D family of commands: DK, DL, Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

DA, D.


12-7

Training Manual


Concentrated Heat FlowIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To apply a heat flow, the following information is needed:– node or keypoint number (which you can identify by picking) O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– heat flow magnitude (which should be consistent with the system of units you are using)

Use: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Thermal > Heat Flow– Or the commands FK or F

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



12-8

Training Manual


Heat FluxIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Heat Flux:

T l h t fl

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To apply heat flux:– Main Menu > Solution > Define

Loads > Apply > Thermal > Heat flux• Choose where you want to

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Choose where you want to apply the heat flux-- usually on lines for 2-D models, on areas for 3-D models.

• Pick the desired entities in the

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Pick the desired entities in the graphics window.

• Then enter the heat flux values. Part 1


• Or use the SF family of commands: SFL, SFA, SFE, SF.


12-9

Training Manual


ConvectionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Convective Loads

T l ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To apply a convection:– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply

> Thermal > Convection• Choose where you want to apply the

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Choose where you want to apply the convection -- usually on lines for 2-D models, on areas for 3-D models.

• Pick the desired entities in the graphics window

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

window.• Then enter the film coefficient and bulk

temperature values. • Or use the SF command family: Part 1


ySFL, SFA, SFE, SF.


12-10

Training Manual


Heat GenerationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Heat Generation

T l h t ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• To apply heat generation:– Maine Menu > Solution > Define Loads >

Apply > Thermal > Heat Generation• Choose where you want to apply

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Choose where you want to apply the heat generation-- usually on areas for 2-D models, on volumes for 3-D models.

• Pick the desired entities in the

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Pick the desired entities in the graphics window.

• Then enter the heat generation values. Part 1


• Or use the BF family of commands: BFL, BFA, BFE, BF.


12-11

Training Manual


Adiabatic SurfacesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• Adiabatic Surfaces– “Perfectly insulated” surfaces where no heat transfer takes place

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Perfectly insulated surfaces where no heat transfer takes place.– This is the default condition, i.e, any surface with no boundary

conditions specified is automatically treated as an adiabatic surface

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-12

Training Manual


Modifying and Deleting LoadsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Modifying and Deleting Loads

T dif l d l i l l th l d

y g gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To modify a load value, simply reapply the load with the new value.

• To delete loads: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete– When you delete solid model loads, ANSYS also

automatically deletes all corresponding finite element loads N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

loads.



12-13

Training Manual


Solutions OptionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Steady State vs. Transient Analysis

A t d t t l i th t th l di diti h

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A steady state analysis assumes that the loading conditions have “settled down” to a steady level, with little or no time dependency.

• A transient analysis conditions that are changing with time. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y g g

• For example, consider the analysis of a clothes iron which takes 1 minute to reach a constant temperature N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– The analysis of the clothes iron for the first 1 minute of operation would be transient.After a constant temperature is reached the analysis would be steady


– After a constant temperature is reached, the analysis would be steady state.


12-14

Training Manual


Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O• Reviewing results of a thermal analysis generally involves:– temperature distribution

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

temperature distribution– thermal gradient distribution– thermal flux distribution O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



12-15

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Temperature Distribution:

• To plot temperature contours OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solution > Temperature– Or use the PLNSOL command.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-16

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Thermal Gradients:

• To plot thermal gradient contours: OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

p g– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu or PLNSOL command– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu or PLESOL command

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-17

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Thermal Flux:

• To plot thermal gradient contours: OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

p g– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu or PLNSOL command– General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu or PLESOL command

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-18

Training Manual


…Review ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Reaction Forces

Th f th ti h t fl t b l th f th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The sum of the reaction heat flows must balance the sum of the applied heat flows

• Best viewed as a listing: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g– General Postprocessor > List Results > Reaction Solution or PRRSOL

command

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



12-19

Training Manual


Verify ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

It is always a good idea to do a “sanity check” and make sure that the solution is acceptable. What you need to check depends on th t f bl l i b t h t i l

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

the type of problem you are solving, but here are some typical questions to ask:

• Do FEA results agree hand calculations or experimental data? ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g p

• Is the temperature solution correct? Check the FEA temperature solution first since FEA heat fluxes are second order results. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Do the reaction heat flows balance the applied heat flows?

• Where is the maximum heat flux located? Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– If it is at a singularity, such as a point load or a re-entrant corner, the value is generally meaningless.


12-20

Training Manual


…Verify ResultsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Is the mesh adequate?– This is always debatable, but you can gain confidence in the mesh by

i ti ti

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

using error estimation.– Other ways to check mesh adequacy:

• Plot the element solution (unaveraged stresses) and look for elements with high heat flux gradients. These regions are

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

elements with high heat flux gradients. These regions are candidates for mesh refinement.

• If there is a significant difference between the nodal (averaged) and element (unaveraged) heat flux contours, the mesh may be too coarse N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

coarse.• Similarly, if there is a significant difference between

PowerGraphics and full graphics heat flux, the mesh may be too coarse. Part 1


• Re-mesh with twice as many elements, re-solve, and compare the results. (But this may not always be practical.)


12-21

Training Manual

Chapter 12 – D. Workshop

WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W12. Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



12-22

Chapter 13

Postprocessing

Training Manual

Chapter 13 - Postprocessing

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are many ways to review results in the general postprocessor (POST1), some of which have already been

d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

covered.

• In this chapter, we will explore two additional methods — query picking and path operations — and also introduce you to the O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p g p p yconcepts of results transformation, error estimation, and load case combination.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-2

Training Manual


A. Query PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Query picking allows you to “probe” the model for stresses, displacements, or other results quantities at any picked location.

y gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• You can also quickly locate the maximum and minimum values of the item being queried. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Available only through the GUI (no commands):– General Postproc > Query Results > Nodal or Element or Subgrid Solu– Choose a results quantity and press OK N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

PowerGraphicsOFF

PowerGraphicsON



13-3

Training Manual


…Query PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Then pick any point in the model to see the results value at that point.• Min and Max will show the value at the minimum and maximum

i t

y gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

points.• Use Reset to clear all values and start over.• Notice that the entity number, its location, and the results value are

also shown in the Picker.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

also shown in the Picker.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPAutomatically

generate text


annotation


13-4

Training Manual


…Query PickingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Continue from the last multi-load-step solution of rib.db

Pl t SEQV f l d t 1

y gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Plot SEQV for load step 1– Query “Nodal Solu” SEQV at several locations, including MIN & MAX. (Switch to

full graphics if needed.)– Switch to PowerGraphics and query “Subgrid Solu.” O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-5

Training Manual


B. Results Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• All direction-dependent quantities that you view in POST1, such as component stresses, displacements, and reaction forces, are

t d i th lt di t t (RSYS)

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

reported in the results coordinate system (RSYS).

• RSYS defaults to 0 (global Cartesian). That is, POST1 transforms all results to global Cartesian by default, including results at O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g y , g“rotated” nodes.

• But there are many situations — such as pressure vessels and spherical structures where you need to check the results in a

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

spherical structures — where you need to check the results in a cylindrical, spherical, or other local coordinate system.



13-6

Training Manual


…Results Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To change the results CS to a different system, use:

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– General Postproc > Options for Outp…– or the RSYS command

All b t t l t li ti i k t ill t

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will report the values in that system.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


Default orientation RSYS,0

Local cylindrical system RSYS,11

Global cylindrical system RSYS,1


13-7

Training Manual


…Results Coordinate SystemIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• RSYS,SOLU– Sets the results CS to “As calculated.”

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will report the values in the nodal and element coordinate systems. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• DOF results and reaction forces will be in the nodal CS.• Stresses, strains, etc. will be in the element CS. (The orientation of

the element CS depends on the element type and the ESYS attribute of the element Most solid elements for example default


attribute of the element. Most solid elements, for example, default to global Cartesian.)

– Not supported by PowerGraphics.


13-8

Training Manual


C. Path OperationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Another way to review results is via path operations, which allow you to: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– map results data onto an arbitrary “path” through the model– perform mathematical operations along the path, including integration

and differentiation– display a “path plot” — see how a result item varies along the path

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

display a path plot see how a result item varies along the path

• Available only for models containing 2-D or 3-D solid elements or shell elements. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-9

Training Manual


…Path OperationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Three steps to produce a path plot:– Define a path O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Map data onto the path– Plot the data

1 Define a Path

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

1. Define a Path– Requires the following information:

• Points defining the path (2 to 1000). You can use existing nodes or locations on the working plane. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• Path curvature, determined by the active coordinate system (CSYS).

• A name for the path. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


13-10

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

1. Define a Path (cont’d)– First activate the desired coordinate system (CSYS). O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– General Postproc > Path Operations > Define Path > By Nodes or On Working Plane

• Pick the nodes or WP locations that form the desired path, and press OK O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p• Choose a path name. The nSets and nDiv fields are best left to

default in most cases.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPFrom Part 1



13-11

To

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

2. Map Data onto Path– General Postproc > Path Operations > Map onto Path (or PDEF

command)

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

command)• Choose desired quantity, such as SEQV.• Enter a label for the quantity, to be used on plots and listings.

– You can now display the path if needed

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– You can now display the path if needed.• General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Paths• (or issue /PBC,PATH,1 followed by NPLOT or EPLOT)

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-12

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

3. Plot the Data– You can plot path items either on a graph: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• PLPATH or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item > On Graph

– or along path geometry:• PLPAGM or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item >

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• PLPAGM or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item > On Geometry

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-13

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS allows you to define multiple paths, each with a unique name that you assign. Only one

th b ti t ti

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

path can be active at a time.

• Besides plots and listings, there are many other path capabilities, including: O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p p , g– Stress linearization — used in the pressure vessel

industry to decompose stress along a path into its membrane and bending components.Calculus functions used in fracture mechanics to N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Calculus functions — used in fracture mechanics to calculate J-integrals and stress concentration factors. Also useful in thermal analyses to calculate the heat lost or gained across a path.D t d t d d t d id l i


– Dot products and cross products — used widely in electromagnetics analyses to operate on vector quantities.


13-14

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Continue with rib postprocessing…

Pl t d th it h t CSYS 1 if d i d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Plot nodes, then switch to CSYS,1 if desired– Define a path using nodes– Map SX or SEQV or other data onto path– Plot the path itself O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Plot the path item on graph and on geometry– Define a second path elsewhere in the model and show how to toggle between

the two.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-15

Training Manual

Chapter 13 – Postprocessing

D. Error EstimationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The finite element solution calculates stresses on a per-elementbasis, i.e, stresses are individually calculated in each element. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• When you plot nodal stress contours in POST1, however, you will see smooth contours because the stresses are averaged at the nodes. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

If you plot the element solution, you will see unaveraged data, which shows the discontinuity between elements. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

σavg = 1100• The difference between averaged and unaveraged stresses gives an indication Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Elem 1 Elem 2

σ = 1200σ = 1000

σ = 1300σ = 1100

of how “good” or how “bad” the mesh is. This is the basis for error estimation.


13-16

σavg = 1200

Training Manual


…Error EstimationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Error estimation is available only in POST1 and is valid only for:– linear static structural and linear steady-state thermal analyses O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– solid elements (2-D and 3-D) and shell elements– Full Graphics (not PowerGraphics)

If these conditions are not met ANSYS automatically turns off

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

If these conditions are not met, ANSYS automatically turns off error estimation calculations.

• To manually activate or deactivate error estimation, use NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– ERNORM,ON/OFF– or General Postproc > Options for Outp



13-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• POST1 calculates the following error measures.– Stress analysis: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)• element stress deviations (SDSG)• element energy error (SERR) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• maximum and minimum stress bounds (SMXB, SMNB)– Thermal analysis:

• percentage error in energy norm (TEPC)l t th l di t d i ti (TDSG)

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• element thermal gradient deviations (TDSG)• element energy error (TERR)



13-18

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)

SEPC i h ti t f th t ( di l t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• SEPC is a rough estimate of the stress error (or displacement, temperature, or thermal flux) over the entire set of selected elements. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Can be used to compare similar models of similar structures subjected to similar loadings.

• SEPC is shown in the legend column of deformed shape displays

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• SEPC is shown in the legend column of deformed shape displays. You can list it manually using PRERR or General Postproc > List Results > Percent Error.



13-19

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• As a general rule of thumb, look for SEPC to be 10% or l If it i hi h th SEPC = 35.149

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

less. If it is higher, then:– Check for point loads or

other stress singularities and unselect elements in the

SEPC 35.149

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

vicinity.– If it is still higher, plot the

element energy error. The elements with high values of N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

genergy error are candidates for mesh refinement. SEPC = 3.484



13-20

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Element stress deviations (SDSG)

• SDSG is a measure of the amount by

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• SDSG is a measure of the amount by which an element’s stress disagrees with the stress averages at its nodes.

• You can plot SDSG contours using

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• You can plot SDSG contours using PLESOL,SDSG or General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu...

• A high value of SDSG is not necessarily NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

A high value of SDSG is not necessarily bad, especially if it is a small percentage of the nominal stresses in the structure.

For example this plate-with-a-hole model SDSG t l ti f i t t


For example, this plate-with-a-hole model shows only a 1.5% stress deviation in the region of interest.

SDSG at location of interest = ~450 psi, which is ~1.5% of ~30,000 psi nominal stress


13-21

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Element energy error (SERR)

SERR i th i t d ith th t i t h t th

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• SERR is the energy associated with the stress mismatches at the nodes of the element. This is the basic error measure from which the other error quantities are derived. SERR has units of energy. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• To plot SERR contours, issue PLESOL,SERR or General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu

• Generally the elements with the highest SERR are candidates for

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Generally, the elements with the highest SERR are candidates for mesh refinement. However, since SERR will always be highest at stress singularities, be sure to unselect those elements first.



13-22

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Stress bounds (SMXB and SMNB)

Th t b d h l d t i th t ti l ff t f

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• The stress bounds can help you determine the potential effect of mesh discretization error on the maximum stress.

• They are displayed on stress contour plots in the legend column ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y p y p gas SMXB (upper bound) and SMNB (lower bound).

• The bounds are not estimates of the actual maximum and minimum but they do define a “confidence band ” Without other

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

minimum, but they do define a “confidence band.” Without other supporting verification, you have no basis for believing that the true maximum stress is below SMXB.



13-23

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Caution: If you don’t unselect elements near stress singularities, the stress bounds are meaningless, as shown below. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N


SMXB = 6,401SMXB = 15,750


13-24

Training Manual


E. Load Case CombinationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Whenever you solve multiple load steps, the results of each load step are stored as separate sets on the results file (identified by load O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

step number).

• A load case combination is an operation between two sets of results which are called load cases

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

results, which are called load cases.– The operation occurs between one load case in the database and the

second load case on the results file.– The result of the operation — the combined load case — is stored back N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

in the database.


Load case in database Load case Combined load case in database


13-25

Load case in database(computer memory)

Load caseon results file

Combined load case in databaseoverwrites previous contents

Training Manual


…Load Case CombinationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Typical procedure:

1 C t th l d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

1. Create the load cases

2. Read one load case into the database ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

3. Perform the desired operation

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-26

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Create Load Cases

A l d i l t i t t t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A load case simply acts as a pointer to a set of results. It requires two pieces of information:

– a unique ID number

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

a unique ID number– the results set it represents (load step and

substep number)

• Use the LCDEF command or General

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Use the LCDEF command or General Postproc > Load Case > Create Load Case



13-27

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Read One Load Case into the Database (memory)

Si l id tif th lt t b it l d

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Simply identify the results set by its load case number using LCASE or General Postproc > Load Case > Read Load Case. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Or use one of the standard “Read Results” choices in the postprocessor (SET command).

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-28

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Perform the Desired Operation

M ti il bl h i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Many operations are available as shown in the menu here.

• Use the LCOPER command or General ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Postproc > Load Case > Add, Subtract, etc.

• Remember that the results of the operation are stored in the database (memory) The

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

are stored in the database (memory). The combined load case is identified on plots and listings as number 9999.



13-29

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are two useful options to save the combined load case:

Write a load case file

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Write a load case file– Append the load case to the results

file

• Writing a load case file (LCWRITE ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

or General Postproc > Write Results) creates a file that is similar to, but much smaller than the results file.

• The Append option (RAPPND or NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

pp p (General Postproc > Load Case > Write Load Case) allows you to add the combined load case to the results file and identify it with a Part 1


ygiven load step number and time value.


13-30

Training Manual


F. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions:W13A. Connecting Rod O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W13B. Spherical ShellW13C. Axisymmetric Fin with Multiple Load Steps

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-31

Training Manual


G. Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The Results Viewer is a specialized postprocessing menu and graphic system.

Fast graphics for large models or models that have many time steps

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Fast graphics for large models or models that have many time steps– Easy to use menu system for quick results viewing

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-32

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Can be created two different ways …– Use the POUTRES command before solving

to write a jobname pgr file during solution

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

to write a jobname.pgr file during solution.– Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts >

Output Ctrls > PGR File

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Hold CTRL key for multiple selection Part 1



13-33

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– Use the PGWRITE command after solution to write a jobname.pgr file.

– General Postproc > Write PGR File

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

General Postproc > Write PGR File

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-34

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Open the Results Viewer from the General Post Processor.

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-35

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Nodal/element/vector/trace results plots

A i t i

Time History Variable Viewer

Report Image

Capture

Report Animation Capture O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Element Plot

Animate using PNG files Report

Listing Capture O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Report Table

Capture

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPResults Set

Locator Time Substep

Raise Hidden

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Query Results

ListImage CaptureReport Generation

Mode

Load Step

Substep


13-36

List Results

Mode

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The graphics window becomes “Context Sensitive”.

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Context-sensitive graphics window

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Context sensitive graphics window

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Right Click on Model


Right Click on Model


13-37

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O


OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

g p

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPRight Click on Contour Legend Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


13-38

Training Manual


…Results ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O


OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

g p

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-39

Right Click on Contour Bar

Training Manual

Chapter 13 – Postprocessing

H. Variable ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The Variable Viewer is a specialized tool allowing one to postprocess results with respect to time. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• The Variable Viewer can be started by:– Simply opening the Time History Postprocessor, or– Main Menu > TimeHist Postproc > Variable Viewer O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-40

Training Manual


…Variable ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Add variable button1

Delete variable button2

Graph variable button3 OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO12

List variable button4

Properties button5

Import data button6 ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Export data button7

Export data type8

Clear Time History Data9

R f h Ti Hi D10

1413 NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Refresh Time History Data10

Variable name input area

1116

Real/Imaginary Components

Variable list12

13

15


17Variable name input area

Expression input area14

Defined APDL variables15

Defined Post26 variables16

13


13-41

17 Calculator

Training Manual


…Variable ViewerIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OOD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOk = 36kN/m O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

100kgx

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP25kg

k = 36kN/m

y Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

F

⎩⎨⎧

<>

=0,0

0,4000t

tNF

y


13-42

⎩ < 0,0 t

Training Manual


I. Report GeneratorIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• A time consuming part of any analysis is documenting the

d l d lt Thi

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

model and results. This procedure has been partially automated through the implementation of the ANSYS O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

pReport Generator.

• The Report Generator allows the user to quickly capture

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

the user to quickly capture pictures, listings, tables, and other pertinent information.


• It also facilitates the creation of an HTML formatted file ready to be distributed to colleagues or posted to a web site


13-43

posted to a web site.

Training Manual


…Report GeneratorIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Launching the Report Generator will shrink the graphics window and set the b k d t hit

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

background to white.

• The “Capture Tool” will be opened allowing the user to grab plots, listings, O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g g p , g ,and tables.

– Utility Menu> File> Report Generator…or

i ’ idl t t lb t ’

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– ~eui,’euidl::report::toolbar::create’or

– Select on the Icon Toolbar.



13-44

Capture Tool

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OTable • Capture Tool

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Animation Capture(multiple PNG files)

Capture

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Image Capture(single PNG file)

S tti

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Settings

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1HTML Report

AssemblerLi ti

The Log File records all captures!

The Log File records all captures!


13-45

Listing Capture

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

HTML Assembler . . .

• A tool that allows quick

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• A tool that allows quick organization of ANSYS graphics, tables, listings .

• Log file can be used as an HTML

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Log file can be used as an HTML template.

– utilize parameter substitution

• The generated HTML file can be NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The generated HTML file can be used with Netscape Composer, Microsoft FrontPage, or any other HTML editor to finalize the report. Part 1



13-46

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Insert TEXT

• Insert any HTML FILE

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Insert any HTML FILE– possibly created outside ANSYS

• Insert an IMAGE possibly one from an external

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– possibly one from an external source like a digital photo

• Insert DYNAMIC DATA information specific to your current N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– information specific to your current ANSYS run like version, run time, etc.

• Insert a Report Heading Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

p g– Including your name, analysis title,

date, and company name


13-47

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Insert information grabbed using the Capture Tool O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Report Images– Contour plots, element plots,

volume plots, graphs ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Report Tables– Material properties, reaction forces,

etc.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Report Lists– Stress along a path, constraints,

etc. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1


13-48

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Preview the report

• Delete sections of the report

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Delete sections of the report

• Move sections of the report up or down O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-49

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OOD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIOO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



13-50

Training Manual


J. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions:W13D. Results Viewer O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W13E. Report Generator

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



13-51

Chapter 14

Short Topics

Training Manual

Chapter 14 – Short Topics

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In this chapter, we will present some general tips and “tricks” on how to use ANSYS more efficiently O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



14-2

Training Manual


A. Toolbar and AbbreviationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• An abbreviation is a short-cut to commonly used functions. It is a character string that represents one or more ANSYS commands. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Whenever you define an abbreviation, it appears as a button in the ANSYS Toolbar, giving you one-button access to the desired function. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• There are five predefined abbreviations when you first start ANSYS, but you can modify them or add your own — up to 100 total abbreviations

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

total abbreviations.



14-3

Training Manual


…Toolbar and AbbreviationsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• As an example, to display line numbers on a line plot, you would need to do the following:

Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering > Line numbers On > OK

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering… > Line numbers On > OK– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines

Later, to turn off line numbers, you would have to use the same menus again

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

again.

• Instead, you could define three abbreviations:– LINE_ON for the command string *ABBR,LINE_ON,/pnum,line,on

LINE OFF f *ABBR LINE OFF / li ff

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– LINE_OFF for *ABBR,LINE_OFF,/pnum,line,off– LPLOT for the command string *ABBR,LPLOT,lplot

and simply press the appropriate combinations of buttons in the toolbar to turn line numbering on or off For example hit followed by to


turn line numbering on or off. For example, hit followed by to turn line numbering on and display a line plot.


14-4

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• The following information is needed for an abbreviation:– The short-cut name

The command string it represents To find out the command for a particular

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– The command string it represents. To find out the command for a particular function, first execute the function using the GUI, then list the log file (Utility Menu > List > Files > Log File).

• Use the *ABBR command to define abbreviations:

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Use the ABBR command to define abbreviations:

– *ABBR, name, command_string

A convenient dialog box is available for this: NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

A convenient dialog box is available for this:– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Edit Toolbar…– or Utility Menu > Macro > Edit Abbreviations…



14-5

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Abbreviations are stored in the standard ANSYS database, so they get saved to the .db file when you save the database. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• You can also write abbreviations to an ASCII file, jobname.abbr:– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Save Toolbar…– or Utility Menu > Macro > Save Abbr

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

or Utility Menu > Macro > Save Abbr…– or ABBSAV command

• To restore abbreviations from a file, use: NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Restore Toolbar…– or Utility Menu > Macro > Restore Abbr…– or ABBRES command Part 1



14-6

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• By creating a series of .abbr files and with a clever use of ABBSAVand ABBRES functions, you can create “nested” toolbars —b tt th t b i ti l t f b tt d t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

buttons that bring up an entirely new set of buttons — and put together a menu of your own!

• Once you master the ANSYS command language, there is virtually ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y g g , yno limit to the power and usefulness of abbreviations!

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



14-7

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume rib.db O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Create abbreviations EPLOT, APLOT, LPLOT, KPLOT– Delete KPLOT abbreviation– Save abbreviations to file.abbr, then list the file

Now list the log file and show the ABBSAVE command (This is how

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Now list the log file and show the ABBSAVE command. (This is how you can find out the commands for a given function.)

– Resume rib.db again– Restore abbreviations from file.abbr and use the buttons N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



14-8

Training Manual


B. Start FileIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Whenever you start ANSYS, it reads a start file called start100.ans(or start90.ans, start81.ans, etc. depending on ANSYS revision). O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• You can include any commands in the start file. The most common ones are abbreviation definitions. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• ANSYS checks for the start file first in the working directory and then in your home directory. If no file is found, it will read the “default” start file in the ANSYS apdl directory (..\v100\ansys\apdl).

Th “d f lt” t t fil t i l t d bb i ti ll f

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– The “default” start file contains several suggested abbreviations, all of them commented out. You can make a copy of it and “uncomment” the ones you want to use.



14-9

Training Manual


C. APDLIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• APDL is an acronym for ANSYS Parametric Design Language, a powerful scripting language that allows you to parameterize your

d l d t t t k

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

model and automate common tasks.

• Using APDL, you can:– input model dimensions, material properties, etc. in terms of

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

input model dimensions, material properties, etc. in terms of parameters rather than numbers.

– retrieve information from the ANSYS database, such as a node location or maximum stress.perform mathematical calculations among parameters including

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– perform mathematical calculations among parameters, including vector and matrix operations.

– define abbreviations (short cuts) for frequently used commands or macros. Part 1


– create a macro to execute a sequence of tasks, with if-then-else branching, do-loops, and user prompts.


14-10

Training Manual


D. Defining ParametersIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To define a parameter, use the format

N V l

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Name=Value– Can be typed in the input window or in

the Scalar Parameters dialog (Utility Menu > Parameters > Scalar Parameters...) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Name is the parameter name, thirty-two alphanumeric characters or less.

– Value may be a number, a previously defined parameter a mathematical N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

defined parameter, a mathematical function, a parametric expression, or a character string (enclosed in single quotes).Can be kept in start## ans file for


– Can be kept in start##.ans file for commonly used parameters, such as PI = acos(-1)


14-11

Training Manual


...Defining ParametersIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• Examples:inrad=2.5 g=386 O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

outrad=8.2numholes=4thick=outrad-inrade=2 7e6

massdens=density/gcircumf=2*pi*radarea=pi*r**2dist=sqrt((y2 y1)**2+(x2 x1)**2)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

e=2.7e6density=0.283bb=cos(30)pi=acos(-1)

dist=sqrt((y2-y1) 2+(x2-x1) 2)slope=(y2-y1)/(x2-x1)theta=atan(slope)jobname=‘proj1’ N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

p ( ) j p j



14-12

See *SET command for a list of valid function

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• The examples above are scalar parameters, which have a single value — either numeric or character. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• ANSYS also supports array parameters, which have multiple values. Both numeric and character arrays are available. Array parameters will not be discussed in this course. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p

28 7 j b1

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

28.7-9.2-2.151.0

xvalues =

job1job2job3job4

filnam = Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

0.0 jjob5


14-13

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

Some naming rules:

P t t b thi t t h t l b i i

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Parameter names must be thirty-two characters or less, beginning with a letter.

• Only letters, numbers, and the underscore character are ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

y , , _allowed.

• Avoid underscore _ as starting character… reserved for ANSYS use

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

use.

• Names are not case-sensitive, i.e, “RAD” and “Rad” are the same. All parameters are internally stored in capital letters. Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• Avoid common ANSYS labels such as STAT, DEFA, and ALL.


14-14

Training Manual


E. Using ParametersIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• To use a parameter, simply enter its name in the appropriate field in the dialog box or on the command. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• For example, to define a rectangle using the parameters w=10 and h=5,

– you can use the menu: ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

you can use the menu:Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Area > Rectangle > By 2 Corners

– or commands: NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

/prep7blc4,,,w,h



14-15

Training Manual


...Using ParametersIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

Note:

Wh t ANSYS i di t l b tit t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• Whenever you use parameters, ANSYS immediately substitutes their values.

The rectangle in the previous example is stored as a 10x5 area, ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g p p ,not as w x h. That is, if you change the value of w or h aftercreating the rectangle, the area will NOT be updated.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



14-16

Training Manual


...Using ParametersIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• Other examples of using parameters:jobname=‘proj1’ O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

/filnam,jobname ! Jobname/prep7youngs=30e6 O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y gmp,ex,1,youngs ! Young’s modulusforce=500fk,2,fy,-force ! Force at KP 2 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

yfk,6,fx,force/2 ! Force at KP 6



14-17

Training Manual


F. Retrieving Database InformationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• To retrieve information from the database and assign it to a parameter, use the *GET command or Utility Menu > Parameters > G t S l D t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Get Scalar Data...

• A vast amount of information is available, including model and results data. Refer to the *GET command description for details. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



14-18

Training Manual


...Retrieving Database InformationIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• Examples:*get,x1,node,1,loc,x ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]* O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

/post1*get,sx25,node,25,s,x ! sx25 = X stress at node 25 [RSYS]**get,uz44,node,44,u,z ! uz44 = UZ displacement at node 44 [RSYS]*nsort s eqv ! Sort nodes by von Mises stress

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

nsort,s,eqv ! Sort nodes by von Mises stress*get,smax,sort,,max ! smax = maximum of last sortetable,vol,volu ! Store element volumes as volssum ! Sum all element table columns N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

*get,totvol,ssum,,vol ! totvol = sum of vol column

*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS) Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)


14-19

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• Some data can be retrieved with a get function.

E l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

Examples:x1=nx(1) ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]*nn=node(2.5,3,0) ! nn = node at or near (2.5,3,0) [CSYS]*/post1

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

/post1ux25=ux(25) ! ux25 = UX at node 25 [RSYS]*temp93=temp(93) ! temp93 = temperature at node 93width=distnd(23,88) ! width = distance between nodes 23 & 88 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPPart 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)

RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)


14-20

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• You can use a get function directly in a field, just like a parameter. For example: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

k,10,kx(1),ky(3) ! KP 10 at X of KP 1, Y of KP 3 [CSYS]*k,11,kx(1)*2,ky(3) ! [CSYS]*f,node(2,2,0),fx,100 ! FX force at node(2,2,0) [CSYS]* O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



14-21

*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)

Training Manual


G. Batch ModeIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• In batch mode, ANSYS reads commands from an input file you supply, and writes responses to an output file. The process runs i th b k d f i t f th k

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

in the background, freeing up your computer for other work.

• Of the three main phases of an analysis — preprocessing, solution, postprocessing — the solution phase is best suited for O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

, p p g pbatch mode. Thus a batch input file could be as simple as:

/batchresume,... ! Resume database from preprocessing session N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

/solusolvefinish Part 1



14-22

Training Manual


H. Input filesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• ANSYS is a command-driven program and can accept commands from several sources:

f GUI di l b ( hi h i l “ d” d t ANSYS

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– from GUI dialog boxes (which simply “send” commands to ANSYS when you press OK or Apply)

– from the keyboard– from input files O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

p

• An efficient way to run ANSYS, especially when you are rerunninga previous analysis, is to use input files containing the desired command sequence: N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

command sequence:– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from…– or the /INPUT command


(The start file is just an input file that is automatically read at start-up by a built-in /input command.)

• The path of the input file can have a maximum length of 250


14-23

• The path of the input file can have a maximum length of 250 characters (path and filename) plus an eight character extension

Training Manual


…Input filesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• For example, you can create a file called rectangle.inp containing the following lines: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

/prep7 ! Enter preprocessorrect,0,3,0,1 ! Create a 3x1 rectangleaplot O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

and then read it into ANSYS:/input,rectangle,inp ! or File > Read Input from…

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• The ! character above indicates a comment and can be used to:– annotate the input file with explanations.– “comment out” an entire command. Part 1

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1• Note: Cutting and pasting commands into the Input window is

NOT a supported feature.


14-24

Training Manual


…Input filesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• When an input file ( or a macro ) is executed in the wrong module, repeated warnings occur. Upon encountering five such warnings

di l b ll i t t d it l l

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

a dialog box appears allowing you to stop and exit cleanly.

• You can use the log file jobname.log as an input file. Keep in mind the following points when you do this: O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g p y– The log file records all commands executed during an ANSYS session.– Always use a copy of the log file, don’t just rename it.– It may be helpful to edit the copy first and: N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• add descriptive comments• “clean it up” by removing erroneous commands and graphics

commands (/view, /focus, /dist, etc.)add prompting commands (*ASK)


• add prompting commands (*ASK)


14-25

Training Manual


…Input filesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

The *ASK Command

*ASK t th f i t d i th t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

• *ASK prompts the user for input and assigns the response to a parameter. For example, you can modify rectangle.inp as follows:

/prep7 ! Enter preprocessor*ask w WIDTH OF RECTANGLE 3

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ask,w,WIDTH OF RECTANGLE,3rect,0,w,0,1 ! Create a wx1 rectangleaplot

Wh i t thi fil i t ANSYS ill th t

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

When you input this file into ANSYS, you will see the prompt shown below. Your response, say 5.2, is assigned to the parameter w, which is used in the subsequent RECT command.



14-26

Training Manual


…Input filesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• *ASK, Par, Query, DVAL– Par is the parameter name to which the response value is assigned. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Query is the prompt string, up to 32 characters. The word ENTER automatically appears as the first word of the prompt.

– DVAL is the default value assigned to Par if the response is blank. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



14-27

Training Manual


I. Session EditorIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Session Editor– Powerful ANSYS “Undo” O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– ANSYS keeps a running copy of your log file from your last save command.

– By modifying the values in the Session Editor window and clicking OK, the modified commands O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g ,are read back into ANSYS.

– Main Menu > Session Editor…

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



14-28

Training Manual


SummaryIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Summary:

D fi t i th f t N V l

yO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Define parameters using the format Name=Value.

• Value may be a number, a previously defined parameter, a mathematical function, a parametric expression, or a character O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

, p p ,string.

• Use *GET or get functions to retrieve data from the ANSYS database

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

database.

• ANSYS stores data in their actual form (numbers or strings), not in the form of parameter names. Part 1



14-29

Training Manual


J. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:W14A Abbreviations O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

W14B 2-D Bracket Using Parameters

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



14-30

Appendix A

ANSYS Native Geometry Creation and Best Modeling

PracticesPractices

Training Manual

Appendix – A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation

OverviewIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Importing geometry is convenient, but sometimes you may need to create it in ANSYS. Some possible reasons: O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– You may need to build a parametric model — one defined in terms of variables for later use in design optimization or sensitivity studies.

– The geometry may not be available in a format ANSYS can read.– The Connection product you need may not be available on your

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

The Connection product you need may not be available on your computer platform.

– You may need to modify or add geometry to an imported part or assembly. N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• ANSYS has an extensive set of geometry creation tools, which we will discuss next.



A-2

Training Manual


A. DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Solid Modeling can be defined as the process of creating solid models. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Definitions:– A solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines,

and keypoints.

Volumes

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

yp– Volumes are bounded by areas, areas by lines, and

lines by keypoints.– Hierarchy of entities from low to high:

k i t li l

Areas

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

keypoints < lines < areas < volumes – You cannot delete an entity if a higher-order entity

is attached to it.

Lines &Keypoints


• Also, a model with just areas and below, such as a shell or 2-D plane model, is still considered a solid model in ANSYS terminology.

Keypoints

Lines

Areas

Volumes


A-3

Keypoints

Training Manual


…DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are two approaches to creating a solid model:– Top-down O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Bottom-up

• Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or areas), which are then combined in some fashion to create the final O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

which are then combined in some fashion to create the final shape.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-4

Training Manual


…DefinitionsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Bottom-up modeling starts with keypoints, from which you “build up” lines, areas, etc. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• You may choose whichever approach best suits the shape of the model, and also freely combine both methods.


• We will now discuss each modeling approach in detail.


A-5

Training Manual


B. Top-Down ModelingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or areas), which are then combined in some fashion to create the final

h

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

shape.– The volumes or areas that you initially define are called primitives.– Primitives are located and oriented with the help of the working plane.– The combinations used to produce the final shape are called Boolean

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

The combinations used to produce the final shape are called Boolean operations.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-6

Training Manual


…Top-Down ModelingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Primitives are predefined geometric shapes such as circles, polygons, and spheres.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• 2-D primitives include rectangles, circles, triangles, and other polygons. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-7

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• 3-D primitives include blocks, cylinders, prisms, spheres, and cones.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-8

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• When you create a 2-D primitive, ANSYS defines an area, along with its underlying lines and keypoints.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• When you create a 3-D primitive, ANSYS defines a volume, along with its underlying areas, lines and keypoints. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-9

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• You can create primitives by specifying their dimensions or by picking locations in the graphics window.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– For example, to create a solid circle:• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle >

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Instructions

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

By picking

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Area Input:

1.) Pick the center and radius in graphics window...


A-10

2.) Or enter in Picker Box

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

– To create a block:• Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes >Block >

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOInstructions ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

By picking

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Volume Input:

1.) Pick the 2 diagonal corners and Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

Z-depth in graphics window...

2.) Or enter in Picker Box


A-11

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Boolean operations are computations involving combinations of geometric entities. ANSYS Boolean operations include add,

bt t i t t di id l d l

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

subtract, intersect, divide, glue, and overlap.

• The “input” to Boolean operations can be any geometric entity, ranging from simple primitives to complicated volumes imported O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g g p p p pfrom a CAD system.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-12

Input entities Boolean operation Output entity(ies)

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• All Boolean operations are available in the GUI under Main Menu Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• By default, input entities of a Boolean operation are deleted after the operation. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Deleted entity numbers become “free” (i.e., they will be assigned to a new entity created, starting with the lowest available number).

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-13

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Add– Combines two or more entities into one.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-14

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Glue– Attaches two or more entities by creating a common boundary

b t th

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

between them.– Useful when you want to maintain the distinction between entities

(such as for different materials).

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-15

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Overlap– Same as glue, except that the input entities overlap each other.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-16

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Subtract– Removes the overlapping portion of one or more entities from a set of

“b ” titi

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

“base” entities.– Useful for creating holes or trimming off portions of an entity.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-17

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Divide– Cuts an entity into two or more pieces that are still connected to each

th b b d i

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

other by common boundaries.– The “cutting tool” may be the working plane, an area, a line, or even a

volume.– Useful for “slicing and dicing” a complicated volume into simpler O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

g g p pvolumes for brick meshing.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-18

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Intersect– Keeps only the overlapping portion of two or more entities.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– If there are more than two input entities, you have two choices: common intersection and pairwise intersection

• Common intersection finds the common overlapping region among all input entities.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

among all input entities.• Pairwise intersection finds the overlapping region for each pair of

entities and may produce more than one output entity.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1


Common Pairwise


A-19

Co oIntersection Intersection

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Partition– Cuts two or more intersecting entities into multiple pieces that are still

t d t h th b b d i

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

connected to each other by common boundaries.– Useful, for example, to find the intersection point of two lines and still

retain all four line segments, as shown below. (An intersection operation would return the common keypoint and delete both lines.) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NNSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPL1

L2

L3

L6

Partition Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1L5

L4


A-20

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– “Drill” a hole by subtracting a circle from a rectangle (or a cylinder

f bl k)

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

from a block)– Create two overlapping entities, save db, and do the overlap

operation. Now resume db and add the entities. Note the difference between the two operations. (Glue is similar to overlap.) O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Interesting model:• block,-2,2, 0,2, -2,2• sphere,2.5,2.7 N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• vinv,all ! intersection



A-21

Training Manual


C. WorkshopIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:WAPP-A 1. Pillow Block O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-22

Training Manual


D. Bottom-Up ModelingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Bottom-up modeling begins with a definition of keypoints, from which other entities are “built up.”

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To build an L-shaped object, for example, you could start by defining the corner keypoints as shown below. You can then create the area by simply “connecting the dots” or by first O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

y p y g ydefining lines and then defining the area by lines.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-23

Training Manual


…Bottom-Up ModelingIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• To define keypoints:– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create >

K i t

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

Keypoints– Or use the K family of commands: K, KFILL,

KNODE, etc.

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

• The only data needed to create a keypoint is the keypoint number and the coordinate location.

– Keypoint number defaults to the next available number. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

– The coordinate location may be provided by simply picking locations on the working plane or by entering the X,Y,Z values.How are the X,Y,Z values interpreted? It depends on the active coordinate system.


A-24

coordinate system.

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• There are many ways to create lines, as shown here.

If d fi l ANSYS ill t ti ll t

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• If you define areas or volumes, ANSYS will automatically generate any undefined lines, with the curvature determined by the active CS. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

• Keypoints must be available in order to create lines.

Create > Lines > Arcs

Create > Lines > Lines

Create > Lines > Splines

Operate >Extrude N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

ArcsLines Splines Extrude



A-25

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Creating areas using bottom-up method requires keypoints or lines to be already defined.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• If you define volumes, ANSYS will automatically generate any undefined areas and lines, with the curvature determined by the active CS. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

Create > Areas > Arbitrary

Operate > Extrude

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

y



A-26

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Creating volumes using bottom-up method requires keypoints or areas to be already defined.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOCreate > Volumes > Operate > Extrude ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Arbitraryp

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPPPart 1



A-27

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Boolean operations are available for entities created by both top-down and bottom-up modeling approaches.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Besides Booleans, many other operations are available:– Extrude– Scale

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Scale– Move– Copy– Reflect N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Merge– Fillet



A-28

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Extrude

• To quickly create volumes from existing areas (or areas

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To quickly create volumes from existing areas (or areas from lines, and lines from keypoints).

• If the area is meshed, you can extrude the elements along with the areas

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

along with the areas.

• Four ways to extrude areas:– Along normal — creates volume by normal offset of areas

[VOFFST] NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

[VOFFST] .– By XYZ offset — creates volume by a general x-y-z offset

[VEXT]. Allows tapered extrusion.– About axis — creates volume by revolving areas about an

axis (specified by two keypoints) [VROTAT]. Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

( p y yp ) [ ]– Along lines — creates volume by “dragging” areas along a

line or a set of contiguous lines [VDRAG].


A-29

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Scaling is typically needed when you want to convert the geometry to a different set of units, say from inches to millimeters.

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To scale a model in ANSYS:– First save the database -- Toolbar >

SAVE_DB or SAVE command.Th M i M P O t

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– Then Main Menu > Preprocessor > Operate > Scale > Volumes (choose the highest-level entity available in the model)

• [Pick All] to pick all volumesTh d i d l f f

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Then enter desired scale factors for RX, RY, RZ and set IMOVE to “Moved” instead of “Copied”

– Or use the VLSCALE command:l l ll 25 4 25 4 25 4 1


• vlscale,all,,,25.4,25.4,25.4,,,1


A-30

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Move

• To translate or rotate an entity by

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

y yspecifying DX,DY,DZ offsets.

– DX,DY,DZ are interpreted in the active CS.– To translate an entity, make the active CS

Cartesian.To rotate an entity make the active CS

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– To rotate an entity, make the active CS cylindrical or spherical.

– Or use the commands • VGEN, AGEN, LGEN, KGEN

Transfer from csys,0 to csys,11

Rotate -30°

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

• Another option is to transfer coordinatesto a different system.

– Transfer occurs from the active CS to a specified CS.

– This operation is useful when you need to


p ymove and rotate an entity at the same time.

– Or use the commands • VTRAN, ATRAN, LTRAN, KTRAN


A-31

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Copy

• To generate multiple copies of an

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To generate multiple copies of an entity.

• Specify the number of copies (2 or greater) and the DX DY DZ offset for

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

greater) and the DX,DY,DZ offset for each copy. DX,DY,DZ are interpreted in the active CS.

• Useful to create multiple holes ribs

Copy inlocalcylindricalCS N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

Useful to create multiple holes, ribs, protrusions, etc.

Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Create outer

areas byskinning


A-32

skinning

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Reflect

T fl t titi b t l

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To reflect entities about a plane.

• Specify the direction of reflection:– X for reflection about the YZ plane

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

X for reflection about the YZ plane– Y for XZ plane– Z for XY plane

All di ti i t t d i th

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

All directions are interpreted in the active CS, which must be a Cartesian system. Part 1


What is the direction of


A-33

What is the direction of reflection in this case?

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Merge

• To attach two entities together by removing coincident keypoints

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• To attach two entities together by removing coincident keypoints.– Merging keypoints will automatically merge coincident higher-order entities, if

any.

• Usually required after a reflect copy or other operation that causes

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Usually required after a reflect, copy, or other operation that causes coincident entities.

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Merge or glueReflect


Merge or gluerequired

Reflect


A-34

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

Fillet

• Line fillet requires two intersecting lines with a

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

• Line fillet requires two intersecting lines with a common keypoint at the intersection.

– If the common keypoint does not exist, do a partition operation first.

– ANSYS does not update the underlying area (if any)

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

– ANSYS does not update the underlying area (if any), so you need to either add or subtract the fillet region.

• Area filleting is similar. Create NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

gfillet


Subtract frombase area

Createarea


A-35

Training Manual



TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Demo:– Resume r.db (if necessary)

Create two keypoints for the axis at (0 0) and (0 1) then extrude the area by

gO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Create two keypoints for the axis, at (0,0) and (0,1), then extrude the area by revolving about the axis 60º

– Resume r.db– Make copies of the rib tangentially about the Y-axis:

C t l l li d i l CS t l b l i i ith THYZ 90

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

• Create a local cylindrical CS at global origin, with THYZ = -90• Generate 7 total copies (6 new ones) with DY=15

– Create the three outer “skin” areas using ASKIN,P– Resume r.db N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

– Create a 0.5R fillet between the top and right lines. (Notice that the lines attached to the area have been modified. This is allowed in some cases.)

– Create the triangular fillet area by lines (AL,P), then subtract it from the main area. Part 1



A-36

Training Manual

Appendix – Workshops

E. WorkshopsIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:WAPP-A 2. Connecting Rod – Bottom-Up Approach O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

WAPP-A 3. Connecting Rod – Importation/Clean-up

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

ANN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N



A-37

Training Manual

Appendix – A. Best Modeling Practices

F. Best Modeling PracticesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• This section is intended to give users advice on best modeling practices that will help the user avoid corrupt databases.

Put as much of your ANSYS input as you can into an input file Even simple

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

– Put as much of your ANSYS input as you can into an input file. Even simple items such as material data and real constant data, so that your analysis is easier to debug (and even parameterize).

– Do not keep ‘deletes’ in your database. Use the input file edit a volume or a element size setting instead of deleting volumes or clearing a mesh

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

element size setting instead of deleting volumes or clearing a mesh.– Perform element attributes (xATT) and Boolean operations BEFORE

meshing. (Absolutely no Booleans after meshing.)– Don't use NUMMRG,KP to pull together non-coincident keypoints.

Examine any imported geometry for slivers voids edges not meeting or NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

– Examine any imported geometry for slivers, voids, edges not meeting, or any other geometrical issue.

– Ideally, creating the geometry in ANSYS is best for meshing, however some users must import geometry. Users first option should be to use a connection product and import a SAT Parasolid etc file As a last resort


connection product and import a SAT, Parasolid, etc file. As a last resort IGES files can also be imported. (Note: It has been some users experience that the time spent in repeatedly ‘cleaning-up’ IGES files, makes the purchase of a Connection Product more than worth the minimal cost.) Try all methods and see what works best for your case.


A-38

Training Manual


...Best Modeling PracticesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• More Suggestions…– Do element attribute assignment on solid model geometry (xATT). Don’t

EMODIF l b l tti (TYPE MAT REAL) l d t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

use EMODIF or global settings (TYPE, MAT, REAL) unless you need to.– Make backup copies periodically (such as jobname.db1, jobname.db2, etc.).– Check the *.err file for all error messages and understand why warning

messages are printed. ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

g p– Use the /EDGE command to display common lines between all adjacent

element faces. With the edge key on, an element plot displays only the element edges without coplanar share element edges. The NSEL,S,EXT command will select external nodes for the selected set of elements After N

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPPN

SYS N

SYS N

SYS ---PPP

command will select external nodes for the selected set of elements. After plotting these nodes, the user should only see the nodes on the edges of the selected elements, any other nodes demonstrate problem locations.

– Do not perform any Booleans operations while you have any concatenated lines or areas in the model


lines or areas in the model.– Don’t divide a line by a meshed line – always clear the mesh before

performing Booleans.– Delete any FE-based elements (ie: contact, pretension, surface effect


A-39

elements) before clearing a mesh.

Training Manual


...Best Modeling Practices IN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• More Suggestions…– Import all geometry at one time - ie.: don’t import, mesh, import. O

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIO

– Don't subtract or overlap coincident or tangent geometry. For example: block,,1,,1,,1 block,,1,,1,,1 vsbv,1,2.

– Minimize use of hardpoints.– Minimize use of dragging and skinning

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

Minimize use of dragging and skinning.– Minimize use of cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems to create

geometry bottom-up from keypoints.– Where surface or rotation are required, for cylinders, spheres, torus, etc.,

t d th i d i d th t i th f

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

extrude the wire around an axis and then trim the surface as necessary. This will eliminate the COONS patch problem by providing more precise NURBS surfaces from the extrusion process.

– Use COONS patches generated on non-cartesian coordinate systems only Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1Part 1

as the last resort. When these are used and the results are needed for Boolean operations use these surfaces or their associated volumes last in your operations.

– If using multiple load step files (LSWRITE), do this last since .s00 files only


A-40

g p p ( ) ycontain loadings for FE data.

Training Manual


...Best Modeling PracticesIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

OIN

TRO

INTR

O

g

• More Suggestions…– Start with very simple models, using a few elements of the element type

d i d d t t ith i l t i l ti b f di t

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

OD

UC

TIOO

DU

CTIO

desired and start with simple material properties before upgrading to, say, a hyperelastic material model.

– Take a Verification Manual problem with a known solution and then start tweaking that towards what you are trying to do. O

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

NO

N TO

AN

ON

TO A

N

– Use the same numbering even though it is redundant – such as TYPE 1, REAL 1, MAT 1 for one part, and TYPE 2, REAL 2, MAT 2, for another part. This makes attribute assignment easy to keep track of.

– Start with a working database and record all Boolean operations in a text NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

NSYS

NSYS

NSYS ---PPP

Start with a working database and record all Boolean operations in a text file. If something goes wrong, you can just edit the file and your db will be fine.

– If the database is corrupt, you can resume the database and archive the file with the CDWRITE as a last resort


with the CDWRITE as a last resort.– Take the time before modeling to plan your approach - this will save you a

lot of time down the road.


A-41

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Documents

Transcript of ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.